Skip to main content Accessibility help
×
Hostname: page-component-7c8c6479df-nwzlb Total loading time: 0 Render date: 2024-03-28T20:08:33.991Z Has data issue: false hasContentIssue false

References

Published online by Cambridge University Press:  22 September 2009

Peter Auer
Affiliation:
Albert-Ludwigs-Universität Freiburg, Germany
Frans Hinskens
Affiliation:
Meertens Institute, Amsterdam and and Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam
Paul Kerswill
Affiliation:
Lancaster University
Get access
Type
Chapter
Information
Dialect Change
Convergence and Divergence in European Languages
, pp. 358 - 408
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Print publication year: 2005

Access options

Get access to the full version of this content by using one of the access options below. (Log in options will check for institutional or personal access. Content may require purchase if you do not have access.)

References

Abraham, W. (1999). ‘Preterite decay as a European phenomenon’, Folia Linguistica 33 (1): 11–18CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Abraham, W. and Bayer, J. (eds.) (1993). Dialectsyntax. Opladen: Westdeutscher verlag
Abrahamson, W. H. F. (1812). Versuch einer vollständigen dänischen Sprachlehre für Deutsche
Ackema, P. and Schoorlemmer, M. (1994). ‘The middle constructions and the syntax-semantics interface’, Lingua 93: 59–90CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Ackema, P. and Schoorlemmer, M. (1995). ‘Middles and nonmovement’, Linguistic Inquiry 2: 173–197Google Scholar
Adams, M. (1987). ‘From Old French to the theory of pro drop’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory 5: 1–32CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Agard, F. (1971). ‘Language and dialect: some tentative postulates’, Linguistics 65, 5–24CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Aitchison, J. (1981). Language Change: Progress or Decay? London: Fontana
Aitchison, J. (1991). 2nd edn. Language Change: Progress or Decay? Douglas, Isle of Man: Fontana
Akselberg, G. (2003). ‘Talevariasjon i Noreg’. In Mæhlum et al. (eds.), Språkmøte. Innføring i sosiolingvistikk. Oslo: Cappelen Akademisk Forlag, 144–165
Alarcos Llorach, E. (1950, 4th edn. 1968). Fonología española. Madrid: Gredos
Alfonzetti, G. (1992). Il discorso bilingue. Italiano e dialetto a Catania. Milan: Angeli
Alarcos Llorach, E. (1996). ‘“Neutralità” sociolinguistica e “neutralità” strutturale nel discorso italiano-dialetto’. In S. C. Sgroi and S. C. Trovato (eds.), Letterature e lingue nazionali e regionali. Rome: Il Calamo, 65–87
Almagro, A. M. (1993). ‘Semantic information in se-constructions in Spanish’. Working Papers in Linguistics: Grammar and the Lexicon 16: 136–154, University of TrondheimGoogle Scholar
Altenhofen, C. V. (1996). Hunsrückisch in Rio Grande do Sul. Ein Beitrag zur Beschreibung einer deutschbrasilianischen Dialektvarietät im Kontakt mit dem Portugiesischen. (= Mainzer Studien zur Sprach-und Volksforschung. 21). Stuttgart
Amara, M. H. (1999). Politics and Sociolinguistic Reflexes: Palestinian Border Villages. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins
Andersen, G. (2001). Pragmatic Markers and Sociolinguistic Variation: A Relevance-theoretic Approach to the Language of Adolescents. Amsterdam: John Benjamins
Andersen, H. (1973). ‘Abductive and deductive change’, Language 49 (4): 765–793CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Andersen, H. (1988). ‘Center and periphery: adoption, diffusion and spread’. In J. Fisiak (ed.), Historical Dialectology. Regional and Social. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 39–83CrossRef
Andersen, H. (1989). ‘Understanding linguistic innovations’. In L. Breivik and E. Jahr (eds.), Language Change. Contributions to the Study of its Causes. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 5–27CrossRef
Angelov, A. (2000). ‘A Balkan political border as a factor for language divergence’, paper presented at the first international conference on Language Variation in Europe (ICLaVE 1), Barcelona, 29 June–1 July
Appel, C. (2001). Læsning og Bogmarked i 1600-tallets Danmark. Copenhagen: Det Kongelige bibliotek/Museum Tusculanum
Appel, R. (1999). ‘“Ik mix gewoon, no span”. De straattaal van jongeren in Amsterdam’, Onze Taal 68 (1): 140–143Google Scholar
Arašonkava, A. and Mackevič, J. (1968). ‘Ab belaruskix dyjalektnyx rysax zaxodnjaha pahraničča [‘On the Belarusian dialect features of the western border region’]. Slavia Orientalis 17 (3): 273–280
Archangeli, D. and Langendoen, D. T. (1997). Optimality Theory: An Overview. Oxford: Blackwell
Arends, J. (ed.) (1995). The Early Stages of Creolization. Amsterdam: Benjamins
Arends, J., Muysken, P., and Smith, N. (eds.) (1995). Pidgins and Creoles. An Introduction. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: Benjamins
Armstrong, N. (1997). Social and Stylistic Variation in Spoken French. Amsterdam: John Benjamins
Arnold, J., Blake, R., Davidson, B., Schwenter, S., and Solomon, J. (eds.) (1996). Sociolinguistic Variation: Data, Theory and Analysis. Stanford: CSLI
Asfandiarova, D. (1999): ‘>Mir verzehle doch Lutherisch und die Katholisch< – Dialektmischung im Vokalismus in der deutschen Sprachinsel Prišib/Aleksejevka (Baschkortostan, Russische Föderation)’. In G. Brandt (ed.), Historische Soziolinguistik des Deutschen Ⅳ: Soziofunktionale Gruppe – Kommunikative Anforderungen – Sprachgebrauch. Internationale Fachtagung, Rostock, 13.-16.09.1998. (= Stuttgarter Arbeiten zur Germanistik. 372). Stuttgart, 241–262
Aubin, H., Frings, T., and Müller, J. (1926). Kulturströmungen und Kultur provinzen in den Rheinlanden. Geschichte, Sprache, Volkshunde. Bonn (Röhrsheid)
Auburger, L. and Kloss, H. (eds.) (1979). Deutsche Sprachkontakte in Übersee. Nebst einem Beitrag zur Theorie der Sprachkontaktforschung. Tübingen
Auer, P. (1988). ‘MHG î and û in the city dialect of Constance’. In Auer and di Luzio, Variation and Convergence Studies in Social Dialectology. Berlin: de Gruyter, 44–75
Auer, P. (1993). Zweidimensionale Modelle für die Analyse von Standard/Dialekt-Variation und ihre Vorläufer in der deutschen Dialektologie. In W. Viereck (ed.), Historische Dialektologie und Sprachwandel. Verhandlungen des internationalen Dialektologen-Kongresses Bamberg 1990: 3–22
Auer, P. (1997). ‘Co-occurrence restrictions between linguistic variables. A case for social dialectology, phonological theory and variation studies’. In F. Hinskens, R. Van Hout, and W. L. Wetzels (eds.), Variation, Change and Phonological Theory, Amsterdam/Philadelphia: Benjamins, 69–100CrossRef
Auer, P. (1998a). ‘Dialect levelling and the standard varieties in Europe’. In P. Auer (ed.), Dialect Levelling and the Standard Varieties in Europe. Folia Linguistica 32, 1/2, 1–9
Auer, P. (1998b). ‘Führt Dialektaubbau zur Stärkung oder Schwächung der Standardvarietät? Zwei Fallstudien’. In K. Mattheier and E. Radtke (eds.), Standardisierung und Destandardisierung europäischer Nationalsprachen. Frankfurt am Main, etc.: Lang, 129–162
Auer, P. (1999a). ‘Das versteckte Prestige des Türkischen. Zur Verwendung des Türkischen in gemischtetnischen Jugendlichen Gruppen in Hamburg’. In I. Gogolin and B. Nauck (eds.), Migration, gesellschaftliche Differenzierung und Bildung: Resultate des Forschungsschwerpunktprogramms FABER. Opladen: Leske and Budrich, 97–112
Auer, P. (1999b). ‘From code-switching via language mixing to fused lects: towards a dynamic typology of bilingual speech’, International Journal of Bilingualism 3 (4): 309–332CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Auer, P. (in press). ‘Phonological Change’. In U. Ammon et al. (eds.), Handbook of Sociolinguistics/Handbuch der Soziolinguistik, 2nd edn. Berlin: de Gruyter
Auer, P. (in press). ‘Europe's sociolinguistic unity; or, a typology of European dialect/standard constellations’. In N. Delbecque et al. (eds.), Perspectives on Variation. Berlin, etc.: Mouton de Gruyter
Auer, P. and Hinskens, F. (1996). ‘The convergence and divergence of dialects in Europe. New and not so new developments in an old area,’ Sociolinguistica 10: 1–30CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Auer, P., Barden, B., and Großkopf, B. (1997). ‘Long-term linguistic accommodation and its sociolinguistic interpretation: evidence from the inner German migration after the Wende’. In Dialect Migration in a Changing Europe. Frankfurt: Peter Lang
Auer, P.Barden, B., and Grosskopf, B. (1998). ‘Subjective and objective parameters determining “salience” in long-term dialect accommodation’, Journal of Sociolinguistics 2: 163–187CrossRefGoogle Scholar
AvanesaÛ, R. I., Atraxovič, K. K., and Mackevič, J. F. (1963). Dyjalektalahičny atlas belaruskaj movy [Dialectological atlas of the Belarusian language]. Minsk: Vydavectva Akadèmii navuk BSSR
AvanesaÛ, R. I. et al. (1968). Linhvistyčnaja heahrafija i hrupoÛka belaruskix havorak [Linguistic geography and the classification of Belarusian dialects]. Minsk: Navuka i tèxnika
Avila, A. M. (1994). ‘Variación reticular e individual de s/z en el Vernáculo Urbano Malagueño: Datos del barrio de Capuchinos’. Analecta Malacitana 17 (1994): 343–367Google Scholar
Bach, A. (1934, 1950). Deutsche Mundartforschung. Heidelberg: Carl Winter Verlag
Baden, J. (1785). Forelæsninger over det Danske Sprog eller Resonneret Dansk Grammatik. Copenhagen: P. Horrebow
Bailey, C.-J. (1973). Variation and Linguistic Theory. Arlington, Va: Center for Applied Linguistics
Bailey, G., Wikle, T., and Tillery, J. (1993). ‘Some patterns of linguistic diffusion’. Language Variation and Change 5: 359–390CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Bally, C. (1968). Linguistique générale et linguistique française, 4th edn. Berne: Francke
Bakker, P. and Maarten, M. (eds.) (1994). Mixed Languages. 15 Case Studies in Language Intertwining. Amsterdam: IFOTT
Bakker, P. and Marcel, C. (eds.) (1991). In the Margin of Romani. Amsterdam (Publikaties van het Instituut voor Algemene Taalwetenschap, Universiteit van Amsterdam, 58)
Bard, E., Robertson, D., and Sorace, A. (1996). ‘Magnitude estimation of linguistic acceptability’, Language 72: 1–31CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Barden, B. and Großkopf, B. (1998). Sprachliche Akkommodation und soziale Integration: sächsische Übersiedler und Übersiedlerinnen im rhein-/moselfränkischen und alemannischen Sprachraum. Tübingen: Niemeyer
Barnes, J. A. (1954). ‘Class and committees in a Norwegian island parish’, Human Relations 7 (1954): 39–58CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Barry, M. V. (1981). ‘The southern boundaries of Northern Hiberno-English speech’. In Michael V. Barry (ed.), Aspects of English Dialects in Ireland: 1, 52–95. Belfast: The Institute of Irish Studies, The Queen's University of Belfast
Bauer, L. (1988). ‘What is lenition?’, Journal of Linguistics 24: 381–392CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Bayard, D. (1990). ‘Minder, Mork and Mindy? (-t) glottalisation and post-vocalic (-r) in younger New Zealand English speakers’. In A. Bell and J. Holmes (eds.), New Zealand Ways of Speaking English. Clevedon: Multilingual Matters, 149–164
Bayley, R., and Pease-Alvarez, L. (1996). ‘Null and expressed pronoun variation in Mexican-descent Children's Spanish’, in Arnold et al. (eds.): 85–99
Beal, J. (1993). ‘The grammar of Tyneside and Northumbrian English’. In Milroy and Milroy (eds.): 187–213
Beals, K., Denton, J., Knippen, R., Melnar, L., Suzuki, H., and Zeinfeld, E. (eds.) (1994). Papers from the 30th Regional Meeting of the Chicago Linguistic Society, Vol. 2: The Parasession on Variation in Linguistic Theory. Chicago: Chicago Linguistics Society
Beckman, M. E., Jong, K., Jun, S.-A., and Lee, S.-H. (1992). ‘The interaction of coarticulation and prosody in sound change’. Language and Speech 35(1/2): 45–58CrossRefGoogle ScholarPubMed
Beebe, L. (1981), ‘Social and situational factors affecting communicative strategy of dialect code-switching’, International Journal of the Sociology of Language 32: 139–149Google Scholar
Bell, A. (1984). ‘Language style as audience design’, Language in Society 13(2): 145–204CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Bell, A. (2001). ‘Back in style: reworking audience design’. In P. Eckert and John R. Rickford (eds.), Style and Sociolinguistic Variation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 139–169
Belletti, A. (ed.) (1993). Syntactic Theory and the Dialects of Italy. Turin: Rosenberg & Sellier
Belletti, A. and Shlonsky, U. (1995). ‘The order of verbal complements: a comparative study’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory 13: 489–526CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Bellmann, G. (1998). ‘Between base dialect and standard language’. In P. Auer (ed.), ‘Dialect levelling and the standard varieties in Europe’, Folia Linguistica, 32: 1–2, 23–34CrossRef
Benincà, P. (1996). ‘Agglutination and inflection in northern Italian dialects’. In Parodi et al. (eds.), 59–72
Benincà, P. (ed.) (1989). Dialect Variation and the Theory of Grammar. Dordrecht: Foris
Benincà, P. (1994). La Variazione Sintattica. Bologna: Il Mulino
Benincà, P. (1988). Piccola storia ragionata della dialettologia Italiana. Padua: Unipress
Bennike, V. (n.d.). Three handwritten specimens of the author's own language (Institut for Dansk Dialektsamlings manuskriptsamling)
Bentahila, A. and Davies, Eirlys E. (1998). ‘Codeswitching: an unequal partnership’. In R. Jacobson (ed.), Codeswitching Worldwide. Berlin and New York: de Gruyter, 25–49CrossRef
Berend, N. and Jedig, H. (1991). Deutsche Mundarten in der Sowjetunion. Geschichte der Forschung und Bibliographie. Marburg: Elwert
Bernard, J. R. L. (1969). ‘On the uniformity of Australian English’, Orbis 18: 62–73Google Scholar
Bernstein, J. (1991). ‘DPs in French and Walloon: evidence for parametric variation in nominal head movement’, Probus 3: 1–26CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Berrendonner, A. (1993). ‘Sujets zéro’. In S. Karaloc and T. Muryn (eds.), ‘Complétude et incomplétude dans les langues romanes et slaves’. Actes du Ⅵe Colloque de linguistique romane et slave, Cracovie, sept 29–oct 3, Cracow: 178–146
Berruto, G. (1970). Dialetto e società industriale nella Valle d'Andorno. Note per una sociologia dei sistemi linguistici, Supplementi al BALI, Torino
Berruto, G. (1989). ‘Tra italiano e dialetto’. In G. Holtus, M. Metzeltin, and M. Pfister (eds.), La dialettologia italiana oggi. Studi offerti a Manlio Cortelazzo, Tübingen, Narr: 107–122
Berruto, G. (1990). ‘Italiano regionale, commutazione di codice e enunciati mistilingui’. In M. Cortelazzo and A. Mioni (eds.), L'Italiano regionale. Rome: Bulzoni, 105–130
Berruto, G. (1995). Fondamenti di sociolinguistica. Rome, Bari: Laterza
Berruto, G. (1997a). ‘Linguistica del contatto e aspetti dell'italianizzazione dei dialetti: appunti di creolistica casalinga’. In G. Holtus, J. Kramer, and W. Schweickard (eds.), Italica et Romanica. Festschrift für Max Pfister zum 65. Geburtstag, Tübingen, Niemeyer: 13–29
Berruto, G. (1997b). ‘Code-switching and code-mixing’. In M. Maiden and M. Parry (eds.), The Dialects of Italy. London, New York: Routledge, 394–400
Bertz, S. (1975). Der Dubliner Stadtdialekt. Doctoral dissertation, Albert-Ludwigs-Universität, Freiburg
Bertz, S. (1987). ‘Variation in Dublin English’, Teanga 7: 35–53Google Scholar
Bex, T. and Watts, R. J. (eds.) (1999). Standard English. The Widening Debate. London/ New York: RoutledgeCrossRef
Biber, D. (1988). Variation across Speech and Writing. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Biber, D., Johansson, S., Leech, G., Conrad, S., and Finegan, E. (1999). Longman Grammar of Spoken and Written English. Harlow: Pearson Education
Biberauer, T. (to appear). ‘How real is embedded V2? Evidence from Afrikaans’. In F. Hinskens, H. den Besten, and J. Koch (eds.), Afrikaans. Een drieluik. Leipzig: Leipziger Universitätsverlag
Bickerton, D. (1975). Dynamics of a Creole System. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Bickerton, D. (1977). ‘Pidginization and creolization: language acquisition and language universals. In A. Valdman (ed.), Pidgin and Creole Linguistics, Indiana University Press, 49–69
Bjerrum, A. (1973). ‘On bilingualism in Slesvig’. In A. Bjerrum, Linguistic Papers. Copenhagen: Akademisk Forlag, 51–74
Bjerrum, A. (1990). ‘Sprogskiftet i Sydslesvig og dets Årsager’, Danske Folkemål, 32: 1–34Google Scholar
Blanc, H. (1968). ‘The Israeli koine as an emergent national standard. In J. Fishman, C. Ferguson, and J. Das Gupta (eds.), Language Problems of Developing Nations, New York: John Wiley, 237–251
Blanche-Benveniste, C. (1997). ‘La notion de variation syntaxique dans la langue parlée’, Langue Française 115: 19–29CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Blevins, J. (1995). ‘The syllable in phonological theory’. In J. Goldsmith (ed.), The Handbook of Phonological Theory. Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 206–244
Blom, J. P. and Gumperz, J. J. (1972, 2nd edn. 1986). ‘Social meaning in linguistic structures: codeswitching in Norway’. In J. J. Gumperz and D. Hymes, Directions in Sociolinguistics. The Ethnography of Communication. Oxford and New York: Basil Blackwell, 407–434
Bloomfield, L. (1933). Language. London: Unwin, 9th reprint (1969)
Boberg, C. (2000). ‘Geolinguistic diffusion and the U.S.–Canada border, Language Variation and Change 12: 1–24CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Boeschoten, H. (1997). ‘Convergence and divergence in migrant Turkish’. In K. Mattheier (ed.), Dialect and Migration in a Changing Europe. Frankfurt am Main: Lang, 145–154
Bohnenberger, K. (1913). Die Mundart der deutschen Walliser im Heimattal und in den Aussenorten. (= Beiträge zur Schweizerdeutschen Mundart 6). Frauenfeld
Boissevain, J. (1974). Friends of Friends. Networks, Manipulators and Coalitions. Oxford: Blackwell
Boissevain, J. (1987). ‘Social network’. In U. Ammon, N. Dittmar, and K. J. Mattheier (eds.), Sociolinguistics. An International Handbook of Language and Society, (Vol. 1). Berlin/New York: Walter de Gruyter. 164–169
Bolognesi, R. (2001). ‘L'arcaicità del Sardo fra stereotipi e teoria del mutamento linguistico’, MS
Borer, H. and Wexler, K. (1987). ‘The maturation of syntax’. In T. Roeper, and E. Williams (eds.), Parameter Setting, Dordrecht: Reidel, 123–172CrossRef
Börjars, K. and Chapman, C. (1998). ‘Agreement and pro-drop in some dialects of English’, Linguistics 36: 71–98CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Börjars, K., Vincent, N., and Chapman, C. (1996). ‘Paradigms, periphrases and pronominal inflection: a feature-based account’. In G. Booij and J. van Marl (eds.), Yearbook of Morphology 1996, Dordrecht: Kluwer, 155–180
Bortoni-Ricardo, S. M. (1985). The Urbanization of Rural Dialect Speakers. A Sociolinguistic study in Brazil. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Bott, E. (1957, 2nd edn. 1971). Family and Social Network. London: Tavistock
Bourciez, É. (1967). Éléments de linguistique romane. 5th edn. Révisée par l'auteur et par les soins de Jean Bourciez, Paris
Bourdieu, P. (1984). ‘Capital et marché linguistiques’, Linguistische Berichte 90: 324Google Scholar
Boyce-Hendricks, J. (1998). ‘Immigration and dialect convergence: on the rise in the use of the reflexive pronoun zich in the city dialects of early modern Holland’, Paper presented at the ESF Conference. ‘The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe’ September. University of Reading:17–19
Bozzini, M. (1994), ‘Sulla commutazione di codice italiano/dialetto in Ticino’, unpublished M.A. thesis, University of Zurich
Brandi, P. and Cordin, P. (1989). ‘Two Italian dialects and the null subject parameter’. In Jaeggli and Safir, (eds.): 111–142CrossRef
Brannigan, P. (1996). ‘Tracing that- trace variation’. In J. R. Black and V. Motapanyane (eds.), Microparametric Syntax and Dialect Variation. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 25–40CrossRef
Bredsdorff, J. H. 1933 (1817). ‘Prøve af en efter Udtalen indrettet dansk Retskrivning’. In J. Glahder (ed.), J. H. Bredsdorffs Udvalgte Afhandlinger. Copenhagen: Levin & Munksgaards Forlag
Bresnan, J. (1995). ‘Linear order, syntactic rank and empty categories: on weak cross-over’. In M. Dalrymple, R. M. Kaplan, J. T. Maxwell, and A. Zaenen (eds.), Formal Issues in Lexical-Functional Grammar, Stanford: CSLI, 241–274
Brink, L. and Lund, J. (1975). Dansk Rigsmål 1–2. Lydudviklingen siden 1840 med særlig henblik på sociolekterne i København. Copenhagen: Gyldendal
Britain, D. (1997a). ‘Was/weren't levelling in the East Anglian Fens’. Essex Research Reports in Linguistics. Colchester: University of Essex
Britain, D. (1997b). ‘Dialect contact, focusing and phonological rule complexity: the koineisation of Fenland English’. In C. Boberg, M. Meyerhoff, and S. Strassel (eds.), A Selection of Papers from NWAVE 25. University of Pennsylvania Working Papers in Linguistics, 4 (1): 141–170
Britain, D. (1997c). ‘Dialect contact and phonological reallocation: “Canadian Raising” in the English Fens’, Language in Society 26: 15–46CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Britain, D. (1999). ‘As far as analysing grammatical variation and change in New Zealand English <is concerned/ø>’. In A. Bell and K. Kuiper (eds.), New Zealand English. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 198–220
Britain, D. (2002a) ‘Diffusion, levelling, simplification and reallocation in past tense BE in the English Fens’, Journal of Sociolinguistics 6(1): 16–43CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Britain, D. (2002b). ‘Space and spatial diffusion’. In J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill, and N. Schilling-Estes (eds.), The Handbook of Language Variation and Change. Oxford: Blackwell, 603–637
Britain, D. (2002c). ‘Phoenix from the ashes?: the death, contact, and birth of dialects in England’, Essex Research Reports in Linguistics 41: 42–73Google Scholar
Britain, D. (2003). ‘Geolinguistics – diffusion of language’, in U. Ammon, N. Dittmar, K. Mattheier and P. Trudgill (eds.), Sociolinguistics/Soziolinguistik. An International Handbook of the Science of Language and Society. 2nd edn. Vol. Ⅰ, Berlin: de Gruyter, 34–48
Britain, D. (forthcoming). ‘Where did New Zealand English come from?’ In R. Harlow, D. Starks, and A. Bell (eds.), The Languages of New Zealand. Wellington: Victoria University Press
Britain, D. and Trudgill, P. J. (1999). ‘Migration, new-dialect formation and sociolinguistic refunctionalisation: reallocation as an outcome of dialect contact’, Transactions of the Philological Society, 97: 245–256CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Brøndum-Nielsen, J. (1951). Studier og Tydninger. Copenhagen: Schultz
Brown, G. (1972). Phonological Rules and Dialect Variation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Brown, L. A. (1981). Innovation Diffusion. London: Methuen
Brown, R. and Gilman, A. (1960). ‘The pronouns of power and solidarity’. In T. A. Sebeok (ed.), Style in Language. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 253–276
Bücherl, R. F. J. (1982). ‘Regularitäten bei Dialektveränderung und Dialektvariation. Empirisch untersucht am Vokalismus nord-/ mittelbairischer Übergangsdialekte’, Zeitschrift für Dialektologie und Linguistik 49: 1–27Google Scholar
Bullier, A. J. (1981). Le parler franco-mauricien au Natal: une enclave francophone en Afrique du Sud: éléments d'une phonologie. Paris
Burt, R. S. (1984). ‘Network items and the General Social Survey’, Social Networks 6: 293–339CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Burzio, L. (1986). Italian Syntax: A Government-Binding Approach. Dordrecht: D. ReidelCrossRef
Butskhrikidze, M. and J. van de Weijer (2001). ‘On de-affrication in Modern Georgian’. In T. van der Wouden and H. Broekhuis (eds.), Linguistics in the Netherlands 2001. Amsterdam Philadelphia: Benjamins, 41–51
Butters, R. R. (1990). ‘Current issues in variation theory’. Paper presented at the First International Congress of Dialectologists, 2 August, University of Bamberg
Bybee, J. (2003). ‘Mechanisms of change in grammaticalization: the role of frequency’. In R. Janda and B. Joseph (eds.), Handbook of Historical Linguistics. Oxford: Blackwell, 602–623CrossRef
Bynon, T. (1983). Historical Linguistics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Byrne, A. (1996). ‘An investigation of some extrinsic and intrinsic constraints exerting pressure on phonological variation in Hiberno-English’. Unpublished project report, School of Clinical Speech and Language Studies, Trinity College Dublin
Cajot, J. (1990). ‘Neue Sprachgrenzbildung an der deutschen Staatsgrenze zu Niederländisch-Ostlimburg, Ostbelgien und Luxembourg’. In Kremer and Niebaum (eds.), 125–152
Callary, R. (1975). ‘Phonological change and the development of an urban dialect in Illinois’, Language in Society 4: 155–170CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cameron, R. (1992). ‘Pronominal and null subject variation in Spanish: constraints, dialects and Functional Compensation. Unpublished Ph.D. diss., University of Pennsylvania
Carden, Guy (1976). Syntactic and semantic data: replication results. Language in Society: S. 99–104CrossRef
Carroll, S. (1983). ‘Remarks on FOR-TO infinitives’, Linguistic Analysis 12: 415–451Google Scholar
Carter, R. and McCarthy, M. (1999). ‘The English get-passive in spoken discourse: description and implications for an interpersonal grammar’, English Language and Linguistics 3: 41–58CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cedergren, H. and Sankoff, D. (1974). ‘Variable rules: performance as a statistical reflection of competence’, Language 50: 333–355CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Chambers, J. K. (1979). ‘Canadian English’. In J. K. Chambers (ed.), The Languages of Canada. Montreal: Didier
Chambers, J. K. (2002). ‘Patterns of variation including change’. In J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill, and N. Schilling-Estes (eds.), Handbook of Language Variation and Change. Malden, Mass., and Oxford: Blackwell, 349–372
Chambers, J. K. (2003). Sociolinguistic Theory. 2nd edn. Oxford: Blackwell
Chambers, J. K. and Trudgill, P. J. (1980) Dialectology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Chambers, J. K. and Trudgill, P. J. (1998). Dialectology. 2nd edn. Cambridge: Cambridge University PressCrossRef
Chapman, C. (1995a). ‘A subject–verb agreement hierarchy: evidence from analogical change in modern English dialects’. In R. M. Hogg and L. van Bergen (eds.), Historical Linguistics, Vol. 2, Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 35–44
Cheshire, J. (1982). Variation in an English Dialect: A Sociolinguistic Study. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Cheshire, J. (1985). ‘Never and the problem of where grammars stop’, Polyglot 6, Fiche 1: Dept of Applied Linguistics, Birkbeck College, London
Cheshire, J. (1987). ‘Syntactic variation, the linguistic variable and sociolinguistic theory’, Linguistics 25: 257–282CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cheshire, J. (1991a). ‘Variation in the use of ain't in an urban British English dialect’, in Trudgill and Chambers (eds.): 54–73
Cheshire, J. (1991b) (ed.), English Around the World. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Cheshire, J. (1994). ‘Standardization and the English irregular verbs’. In D. Stein and I. Tieken-Boon (eds.), Towards a Standard English. Amsterdam: Mouton de Gruyter, 115–133
Cheshire, J. (1995). ‘That jacksprat: an interactional perspective on English that’, Journal of Pragmatics 25: 369–393CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cheshire, J., (1998). ‘Taming the vernacular: some repercussions for the study of syntactic variation and spoken grammar’, Te Reo: Journal of the Linguistics Society of New Zealand 41: 6–27Google Scholar
Cheshire, J. (1999). ‘Spoken standard English’, In T. Bex and R. J. Watts (eds.), Standard English: The Widening Debate. London: Routledge, 129–148
Cheshire, J. (2002a). ‘Sex and gender in variationist research’. In J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill, and N. Schilling-Estes (eds.), Handbook of Language Variation and Change. Malden, Mass., and Oxford: Blackwell, 423–443
Cheshire, J. (2002b). ‘Border crossing: syntactic and pragmatic variation’. Plenary lecture, Methods in Dialectology Ⅺ, Joensuu, Finland, 6 August 2002
Cheshire, J. (in press). ‘Syntactic variation and beyond: gender and social class variation in the use of discourse-new markers’, Journal of Sociolinguistics
Cheshire, J. and Edwards, V. (1991). ‘Children as sociolinguistic researchers’, Linguistics and Education 3: 225–250CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cheshire, J. and Stein, D. (1997). ‘Nonstandard and standard syntax’. In J. Cheshire and D. Stein (eds.), Taming the Vernacular: From Dialect to Written Standard Language. Harlow: Longman, 1–12
Cheshire, J. and Williams, A. (2002). ‘Information structure in male and female adolescent talk’, Journal of English Linguistics 30: 217–238CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cheshire, J., Edwards, V., and Whittle, P. (1989). ‘Urban British dialect grammar: the question of dialect levelling’, English Worldwide 10: 185–225CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cheshire, J., Kerswill, P., and Williams, A. (1999). ‘The role of adolescents in dialect levelling’. Final report submitted to the Economic and Social Research Council (ref. R000236180)
Chirrey, D. (1999). ‘Edinburgh: descriptive material’. In P. Foulkes, and G. J. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 223–229
Cholewa, Jªrgen (1993). ‘Störungen der lexikalisch-morphologischen Wortverarbeitung bei Aphasie: Ein Literaturüberblick’, In Neurolinguistik 7 (2): 105–126Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. (1976). ‘Conditions on rules of grammar’, Linguistic Analysis 2: 303–351Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. (1981a). Lectures on Government and Binding. Dordrecht: Foris
Chomsky, N. (1981b). ‘Principles and parameters in syntactic theory’. In N. Hornstein and D. Lightfoot (eds.), Explanation in Linguistics. London: Longman, 32–75
Chomsky, N. (1982). Some Concepts and Consequences of the Theory of Government and Binding. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press
Chomsky, N. (1986a). Barriers. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press
Chomsky, N. (1986b). Knowledge of Language: Its Nature, Origin and Use. New York: Praeger
Chomsky, N. (1989). ‘Some notes on the economy of derivation and representation’. In I. Laka and A. Mahajan (eds.), MIT Working Papers in Linguistics 10: Functional Heads and Clause Structure, Cambridge, Mass.: Dept of Linguistics and Philosophy, MIT, 43–74
Chomsky, N. (1993). ‘A minimalist program for linguistic theory’. In K. Hale and S. J. Keyser (eds.), The View from Building 20. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1–52
Chomsky, N. (1995). The Minimalist Program. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press
Chomsky, N. (1999). ‘Derivations by Phase’. Unpublished MS., MIT
Chomsky, N. and Lasnik, H. (1977). ‘Filters and control’, Linguistic Inquiry 8: 425–504Google Scholar
Christen, Helen (1998). ‘Convergence and divergence in the Swiss German dialects’. In P. Auer (ed.), Dialect levelling and the standard varieties in Europe. Folia Linguistica, 32: 1/2, 53–67CrossRef
Christen, Helen (2000). ‘Chamäleons und Fossilien’. In D. Stellmacher (ed.), Dialektologie zwischen Tradition und Neuansätzen. Stuttgart: Steiner, 33–47
Christensen, K. and Taraldsen, K. (1989). ‘Expletive chain formation and past participle agreement in Scandinavian dialects’. In Benincà (ed.): 53–84
Christian, D., Wolfram, W., and Dube, N. (1988). Variation and Change in Geographically Isolated Communities: Appalachian English and Ozark English. Publication of the American Dialect Society, 74, Tuscaloosa, Al.: University of Alabama Press
Clahsen, H. (1991). ‘Constraints on parameter setting: a grammatical analysis of some acquisition stages in German child language’, Language Acquisition 1: 361–391CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Clahsen, H. and Muysken, P. (1986). ‘The availability of UG to adult and child learners: the study of acquisition of German word order’, Second Language Research 2: 92–119Google Scholar
Clark, T. L. (1972). Marietta, Ohio: The Continuing Erosion of a Language Island. Publication of the American Dialect Society, 57. Alabama
Clarke, S. (1986). ‘Sociolinguistic patterning in a New World dialect of Hiberno-English’. In Harris et al. (eds.), Perspectives on the English Language in Ireland. Dublin: CLCS, Trinity College Dublin, 67–81
Clarke, S. (1991). ‘Phonological variation and recent language change in St John's English’. In J. Cheshire, English Around the World: Sociolinguistic Perspectives. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 108–122
Clarke, S. (1997). ‘The role of Irish English in the formation of New World Englishes: the case from Newfoundland’. In J. Kallen (ed.), Focus on Ireland. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 207–225CrossRef
Clemmensen, N. (1994). ‘Bondevenner og bondevenner – to alen af et stykke? En komparativ undersøgelse af de danske og norske bondevenneorganisationer’, Fortid og Nutid 2: 134–157Google Scholar
Clemmensen, N. 2002. ‘Adel under pres. Tysk eller dansk “Sonderweg”’, Historisk Tidsskrift, 102(2): 451–467Google Scholar
Clyne, M. (1967). Transference and Triggering. The Hague: Nijhoff
Coates, J. (1986). Women, Men and Language. London/New York: Longman
Coetsem, F. van (2000). A General and Unified Theory of the Transmission Process in Languge Contact. Heidelberg: Universitätsverlag C. Winter
Collins, B. and Mees, I. M. (1996). ‘Spreading everywhere? How recent a phenomenon is glottalisation in Received Pronunciation?’, English World-Wide 17: 175–187CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cornips, L. (1994). Syntactische variatie in het Algemeen Nederlands van Heerlen (Syntactic variation in Heerlen Dutch). IFOTT 6. Dordrecht: ICG-Printing
Cornips, L. (1996a). ‘The spread of the reflexive adjunct middle in the Limburg dialects: 1885–1994’. In C. Cremer and M. Den Dikken (eds.), Linguistics in the Netherlands 1996. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 45–60
Cornips, L. (1996b). ‘Social stratification, linguistic constraints and inherent variability in Heerlen Dutch: the use of the infinitival complementizers om/voor’. In Arnold et al. (eds.): 453–468
Cornips, L. (1997). ‘De betrouwbaarheid van de schriftelijke enquête Willems (1885): De adjunct middel in de Limburgse dialecten’, Gramma/TTT 5 (2): 61–76Google Scholar
Cornips, L. (1998a). ‘Syntactic variation, parameters and their social distribution’, Language Variation and Change 10 (1): 1–21CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cornips, L. (1998b). ‘Political borders and converging/diverging dialects and dialects/standard languages in Limburg (The Netherlands) and the surrounding area in Rhineland (Germany) between 1885 and 1994’, Paper presented at the ESF Conference: The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe, 17–19 September, University of Reading
Cornips, L. (2000). ‘Variatie in reflexieve middel-constructies in het Heerlense dialect en in de Rijnlandse dialecten’. In H. den Besten, E. Elffers, and J. Luif (eds.), Samengevoegde Woorden. Amsterdam: Dept of Dutch Linguistics, University of Amsterdam, 33–45
Cornips, L. (2000). ‘The use of gaan + infinitive in narratives of older bilingual children of Moroccan and Turkish descent’. In H. de Hoop and T. van der Wouden (eds.), Linguistics in the Netherlands 2000, 57–67
Cornips, L. and Hulk, A. (1996). ‘Ergative reflexives in Heerlen Dutch and French’, Studia Linguistica 50 (1): 1–21CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cornips, L. and Hulk, A. (1999). ‘Affected objects in Heerlen Dutch and Romance’, Languages in Contrast 1(2): 191–210CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cornips, L. and Hulk, A. (2002). ‘Argumentreductie en aspekt in onpersoonlijke intransitieve constructies’, Nederlandse Taalkunde 17, 1. 2–19Google Scholar
Corrigan, K. P. (1993). ‘Hiberno-English syntax: nature vs. nurture in a creole setting’, Newcastle and Durham Working Papers in Linguistics 1: 95–131Google Scholar
Corrigan, K. P. (1996). ‘The acquisition and properties of a contact vernacular grammar’. In A. Ahlqvist and V. Čapková (eds.), Dán do Oide. Dublin: Linguistics Institute of Ireland, 75–94
Corrigan, K. P. (1997). ‘The Syntax of South Armagh English in its Socio-historical Perspective’. Unpub. Ph.D. diss. University College Dublin
Corrigan, K. P. (1998). ‘Inviting the ugly sisters to the ball’. Paper presented at the ESF Conference: The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe, 17–19 September, University of Reading
Corrigan, K. P. (2000). ‘What are small clauses doing in South Armagh English, Irish and Planter English?’ In H. L. C. Tristram (ed.), Celtic Englishes Ⅱ. Heidelberg: Carl Winter Verlag, 75–96
Corrigan, K. P. (2003). ‘For-to infinitives and beyond: interdisciplinary approaches to non-finite complementation in a rural Celtic English’. In H. L. C. Tristram (ed.), Celtic Englishes Ⅲ. Heidelberg: Carl Winter Verlag, 318–338
Coseriu, E. (1974). Synchronie, Diachronie und Geschichte. Das Problem des Sprachwandels. Übers. v. Helga Sohre. Munich
Coseriu, E. (1980). ‘“Historische Sprache” und “Dialekt”’. In J. Göschel, P. Ivic, and K. Kehr (eds.), Dialekt und Dialektologie. Wiesbaden: Steiner, 106–122
Coseriu, E. (1981). ‘Los conceptos de “dialecto”, “nivel” y “estilo de lengua” y el sentido proprio de la dialectología’, Lingua española actual 3 (1): 1–32Google Scholar
Coulmas, F. (ed.) (1997). The Handbook of Sociolinguistics. Oxford: Blackwell
Couper-Kuhlen, E. (1996). ‘The prosody of repetition: on quoting and mimicry’. In E. Couper-Kuhlen and M. Selting (eds.), Prosody in Conversation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 366–405CrossRef
Coupland, N. (1980). ‘Style-shifting in a Cardiff work-setting’, Language in Society 9: 1–12CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Coupland, N. (1984). ‘Accommodation at work: some phonological data and their implications’, International Journal of the Sociology of Language 46: 49–70Google Scholar
Coupland, N. (1988). Dialect in Use: Sociolinguistic Variation in Cardiff English. Cardiff: University of Wales Press
Coveney, A. (1997). ‘L'approche variationniste et la description de la grammaire du français’, Langue Française 115: 88–100CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Coveney, A. (2000). ‘Vestiges of nous and the 1st person plural verb in informal spoken French’, Language Sciences 22: 447–481CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Coveney, A. (2002). ‘Supplement: a critical survey of recent research on grammatical variability, negation and interrogation in French’, Variability in Spoken French. Bristol: Intellect
Craig, C. (1997). ‘Language contact and language degeneration’. In F. Coulmas (ed.), The Handbook of Sociolinguistics. Oxford: Blackwell, 257–270
Crain, S. (1991). ‘Language acquisition in the absence of experience’, Behavioral and Brain Sciences 14: 597–650CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Crowley, T. (1992). An Introduction to Historical Linguistics. 2nd edn. Oxford: Oxford University Press
Cuevas, I. (2001). ‘Variación social, reticular e individual de las consonantes obstruyentes palatales y dentales en Nueva Málaga’. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis. Área de Lingüística General. Málaga: Universidad de Málaga
Cukor-Avila, P. and Bailey, G. (1996). ‘The spread of urban AAVE: a case study’, in Arnold et al. (eds.): 469–485
Daan, J. (1987). Ik was te bissie … Nederlanders en hun taal in de Verenigde Staten. Zutphen: Walburg
Daan, J., Deprez, K., van Hout, R., and Stroop, J. (1985). Onze veranderende taal. Utrecht/Antwerp: spectrum
Dailey-O'Cain, J. (2000). ‘The sociolinguistic distribution and attitudes towards focuser like and quotative like’, Journal of Sociolinguistics 4: 60–80CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Dal Negro, S. (1998). ‘The Swiss/Italian border: The emergence of new verbal morphosyntax in a Walser dialect’. Paper presented at the ESF Conference: The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe, 17–19 September, University of Reading
Damsholt, T. (2000). Fædrelandskærlighed og Borgerdyd. Copenhagen: Museum Tusculanum
Dauzat, A. (1922). La géographie linguistique. Paris: Flammarion
Davies, P. (1992). ‘The non-Bejing dialect component in Modern Standard Chinese’. In K. Bolton and H. Kwok (eds.), Sociolinguistics Today. International Perspectives. London/New York: Routledge, 192–206
De Graff, M. (1997). ‘Verb syntax in, and beyond, creolization’. In Haegeman (ed.): 64–94
De Vink, L. (2004). ‘Dialect en dialectverandering in Katwijk aan Zee’. Ph.D. thesis, University of Leiden
De Wulf, E., Taeldeman, J. (forthcoming). ‘Apocope en insertie van –n na sjwa in de zuidelijke Nederlandse dialecten: conditionering en geografie’. To appear in Taal en Tongval
Den Besten, H. Muysken, P., and Smith, N. (1995). ‘Theories focusing on the European input’. In Arends, Muysken, L. and Smith (eds.), 87–98
Denning, K., Inkelas, S., McNair-Knox, F., and Rickford, J. (eds.) (1987). Variation in Language. NWAV-ⅩⅤ at Stanford
Deprez, K. (1981). Naar een eigen identiteit. Resultaten en evaluatie van tien jaar taalsociologisch en sociolingudstisch onderzoek betreffende de standaardtaal in Vlaanderen. Ph.D. thesis, University of Leuven
Déprez, V. and Pierce, A. (1993). ‘Negation and functional projections in early grammar’, Linguistic Inquiry 24: 25–67Google Scholar
Dewulf, H., Keymeulen, J., and Verstraete, F. (1981). ‘Westvlaamse expansie en standaardizering: een sociolingudstische benadering’, Taal en tongval 33, 52–61Google Scholar
Dillard, J. L. (1972). Black English: Its History and Usage in the United States. New York: Random House
Dines, E. (1980). ‘Variation in discourse – and stuff like that’, Language in Society 9: 13–31CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Dinges, G. (1923). ‘Ueber unsere Mundarten’. In Beiträge zur Heimatkunde des deutschen Wolgagebiets. Mit einer Karte und einer Tabelle. Pokrowsk a/W: 60–72
Dinges, G. (1925). ‘Zur Erforschung der wolgadeutschen Mundarten. (Ergebnisse und Aufgaben)’, Teuthonista 1(4): 299–313Google Scholar
Dittmar, N. and Schlobinski, P. (1985). ‘Die Bedeutung von sozialen Netzwerken für die Erforschung von Ortssprachen’. In W. Besch and K. J. Mattheier (eds.), Ortssprachenforschung. Beiträge zu einem Bonner Kolloquium. Berlin: Erich Schmidt Verlag, 158–188
Dixon, R. M. W. (1991). A New Approach to English Grammar on Semantic Principles. Oxford: Clarendon Press
Docherty, G. J. and Foulkes, P. (1999). ‘Derby and Newcastle: instrumental phonetics and variationist studies’. In P. Foulkes and G. J. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 47–71
Docherty, G., Foulkes, P., Parsons, L., Thompson, J., Tillotson, J., and Watt, D. (2000). ‘Phonological variation in child-directed speech’. Paper presented at VIEW 2000, 14–16 September, University of Essex
Docherty, G. J., Foulkes, P., Milroy, J., Milroy, L., and Walshaw, D. (1997). ‘Descriptive adequacy in phonology: a variationist perspective’, Journal of Linguistics 33: 275–310CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Donnan, H. and Wilson, T. (1994). ‘An anthropology of frontiers’. In H. Donnan and T. Wilson (eds.), Border Approaches: Anthropological Perspectives on Frontiers. Lanham, Maryland: University Press of America, 1–14
Dressler, W. U. (1986). ‘Explanation in natural morphology, illustrated with comparative and agent-noun formation’, Linguistics 24: 519–548CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Dulson, A. (1933). ‘Einige lautliche Eigentümlichkeiten der wolgadeutschen Mundarten’. In Revolution und Kultur 5. Engels: 46–54Google Scholar
Dulson, A. (1941). ‘Problema skreschtschenija dialektow po materialam jasyka nemzew Powolshja’. In Iswestija Akademii nauk Sojusa SSR, Otdelenie literatury i jasyka 3: 82–96Google Scholar
Dyer, J. A. (2000). ‘Language and identity in a Scottish-English community: a phonological and discoursal analysis’. Ph.D. thesis, University of Michigan
Dyer, J. A. (2002). ‘“We all speak the same round here.” Dialect levelling in a Scottish-English community’, Journal of Sociolinguistics 6: 99–116CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Eckert, P. (1988). ‘Sound change and adolescent social structure’, Language in Society 17: 183–207CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Eckert, P. (1989a). Jocks and Burnouts: Social Categories and Identity in the High School. New York: Teachers College Press
Eckert, P. (1989b). ‘The whole woman: sex and gender differences in variation’, Language Change and Variation 1: 245–268CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Eckert, P. (2000). Linguistic Variation as Social Practice. Oxford: Blackwell
Edwards, V. (1993). ‘The grammar of southern British English.’ In J. Milroy and L. Milroy (eds.), Real English: The Grammar of English Dialects in the British Isles. London: Longman, 214–238
Edwards, V., Trudgill, P. J., and Weltens, B. (1984). The Grammar of English Dialect: A Survey of Research. London: ESRC
Eisenberg, P. (1994). Grundriss der deutschen Grammatik. 3rd edn. Stuttgart: MetzlerCrossRef
Eisikovits, E. (1991a). ‘Variation in the lexical verb in inner-Sydney English’, in Trudgill and Chambers (eds.): 120–144
Eisikovits, E. (1991b). ‘Variation in subject–verb agreement in Inner Sydney English’. In J. Cheshire (ed.), English around the World: Sociolinguistic Perspectives. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 235–255
Elordui, A. (1998). ‘Changes in the verb–object agreement system of some Basque dialects’, paper presented at the conference: The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe, 17–19 September, Reading
Engelking, A. (1999). ‘The natsyas of the Grodno region of Belarus: a field study’, Nations and Nationalism 5 (2), 175–206CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Epstein, R. (1994). ‘The development of the definite article in French’. In W. Pagliuca, (ed.), Perspectives on Grammaticalisation. [Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, 109]. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 63–80CrossRef
Epstein, R. (1995). ‘The later stages in the development of the definite article: evidence from French’. In H. Andersen (ed.), Historical Linguistics, 1993. Papers from the 11th International Conference on Historical Linguistics 16–20 August, 1993. [Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, 124]. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 159–175CrossRef
Erman, B. (1993). ‘Female and male usage of pragmatic expressions in same-sex and mixed-sex interaction’, Language Variation and Change 4: 217–234CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Ervin, S. and Osgood, C. (1954). ‘Second language learning and bilingualism’, Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49: 139–146Google Scholar
Faarlund, J. T. (1985). ‘Pragmatics in diachronic syntax’, Studies in Language 9: 363–393CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Fagan, S. (1992). The Syntax and Semantics of Middle Constructions. A Study with Special Reference to German. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Farrar, K. and Jones, M. C. (2002). ‘Introduction’. In K. Farrar and M. C. Jones (eds.), Language Change: The Interplay of Internal, External and Extra-Linguistic Factors. New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 1–16CrossRef
Fasold, R. W. (1978). ‘Language variation and linguistic competence’. In D. Sankoff (ed.), Linguistic Variation: Models and Methods. London: Academic Press, 85–95
Fasold, R. W. (1984). The Sociolinguistics of Society. Oxford: Blackwell
Fasold, R. W. (1990). The Sociolinguistics of Language. Oxford: Blackwell
Fasold, R. W. (1991). ‘The quiet demise of variable rules’, American Speech 66: 3–21CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Fasold, R. and Schiffrin, D. (eds.) (1989). Language Change and Variation. Amsterdam: John Benjamins
Feagin, C. (1979). Variation and Change in Alabama English: A Sociolinguistics Study of the White Community. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press
Feldbæk, O. (1990). ‘Den lange Fred’. In O. Olsen (ed.), Gyldendal og Politikens Danmarkshistorie 1700–1800, Vol. 9. Copenhagen: Gyldendal & Politiken
Feldbæk, O. (ed.) (1991–92). Dansk Identitetshistorie, Vols. 1–4. Copenhagen: C. A. Reitzel
Feldbæk, O. (1994). ‘National identity in eighteenth-century Denmark’. In C. Bjørn, A. Grant, and K. Stringer (eds.), Nations, Nationalism and Patriotism in the European Past. Copenhagen: Academic Press, 137–145
Ferrara, K. and Bell, B. (1995). ‘Sociolinguistic variation and discourse function of constructed dialogue introducers: the case of be + like’, American Speech 70: 265–289CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Filppula, M. (1995). ‘The story of language contact in Ireland: how unique, how universal?’, Teanga 15: 31–48Google Scholar
Foldvik, A. K. (n.d.). ‘The pronunciation of r in Norwegian with special reference to the spread of dorsal r’. Unpublished paper
Foley, J. (1977). Foundations of Theoretical Phonology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Ford, C. E. (2001). ‘At the intersection of turn and sequence: negation and what comes next’. In M. Selting and E. Couper-Kuhlen (eds.), Studies in Interactional Linguistics. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 51–79CrossRef
Foulkes, P. and Docherty, G. (eds.) (1999). Urban voices. Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold
Foulkes, P., Docherty, G., and Watt, D. J. L. (1999). ‘Tracking the emergence of structured variation’, Leeds Working Papers in Linguistics and Phonetics 7: 1–25Google Scholar
Foulkes, P. and Docherty, G. (1999). ‘Urban voices: overview’. In P. Foulkes and G. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 1–24
Foulkes, P. and Docherty, G. (2000). ‘Another chapter in the story of /r/: “labiodental” variants in British English’, Journal of Sociolinguistics 4: 30–59CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Franceschini, R. (1998). ‘Code-switching and the notion of code in linguistics: proposals for a dual focus model’. In P. Auer (ed.), Code-Switching in Conversation. Language, interaction and identity. London/New York: Routledge, 51–72
Friedemann, M.-A. and Rizzi, L. (eds.) (2000). The Acquisition of Syntax. London: Longman
Frings, Th. (1936). Die Grundlagen des Meissnischen Deutsch. Halle (Niemeyer)
Frings, Th. (1956). Sprache und Geschichte. Halle: Max Niemeyer Verlag
Gadet, F. (1997). ‘La variation, plus qu'une écume’, Langue Française 115: 5–18CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Gal, S. (1979). Language Shift: Social Determinants of Linguistic Change in Bilingual Austria. New York: Academic Press
Gal, S. (1998). ‘Cultural bases of language use among German-speakers in Hungary’. In P. Trudgill and J. Cheshire (eds.): The Sociolinguistics Reader. Vol. 1: Multilingualism and Variation. London: 113–121
Gamrath, H. (1980). Københavns Historie, Vol. 2. Copenhagen: Gyldendal
García, E. C. (1985). ‘Shifting variation’, Lingua 67: 189–224CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Geeraerts, D., Grondelaers, S., and Speelman, D. (1999). Convergentie en divergentie in de Nederlandse woordenschat. Een onderzoek naar kleding-en voetbaltermen. Amsterdam: Publikaties van het Meertensinstituut
Geerts, G. (1983). ‘Brabant als een centrum van standaardtaalontwikkeling in Vlaanderen’, Forum der Letteren 24: 55–63Google Scholar
Geerts, G., Haeseryn, W., de Rooy, J., and Van den Toorn, M. (eds.) (1984). Algemene Nederlandse Spraakkunst. Groningen: Wolters-Noordhoff
Gerner, H. 1919 (1690). ‘Epitome Philologiæ Danicæ’, in H. Bertelsen (ed.), Danske Grammatikere, Vol. 3. Copenhagen: Gyldendal, 251–318
Gerritsen, M. (1999). ‘Divergence of dialects in a linguistic laboratory near the Belgian–Dutch–German border: similar dialects under the influence of different standard languages’, Language Variation and Change 11 (1): 43–66CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Giacalone Ramat, A. (1995). ‘Code-switching in the context of dialect/standard language relations’. In L. Milroy and P. Muysken (eds.), One speaker, Two Languages. Cross-disciplinary Perspectives on Code-switching. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 45–67CrossRef
Giegerich, Heinz, J. (1992). English Phonology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Giles, H. (1973). ‘Accent mobility: a model and some data. Anthropological Linguistics 15, 87–105Google Scholar
Giles, H. (ed.) (1984). The Dynamics of Speech Accommodation. International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 46
Giles, H. and Bourhis, R. Y. (1976). ‘Black speakers with white speech – a real problem?’ In G. Nickel (ed.), Proceedings of the 4th International Congress Applied Linguistics Vol. 1, Stuttgart: Hochschul-Verlag, 575–84
Giles, H., Bourhis, R., and Taylor, D. (1977). ‘Towards a theory of language in inter-ethnic group relations’. In H. Giles (ed.), Language, Ethnicity and Intergroup Relations. London: Academic Press, 307–348
Giles, H. and Coupland, N. (1991). Language: Contexts and Consequences. Milton Keynes: Open University Press
Giles, H., Coupland, N., and Coupland, J. (1991). ‘Accommodation theory. Communication, context, and consequences’. In idem (eds.), Contexts of Accommodation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, and Paris: Éditions de la maison des sciences de l'homme, 1–68CrossRef
Giles, H., Hewstone, M., Ryan, E. B., and Johnson, P. (1987). ‘Research on language attitudes’. In U. Ammon, N. Dittmar, and K. J. Mattheier (eds.), Sociolinguistics. An International Handbook of the Science of Language and Society. Berlin/New York: Walter de Gruyter, 585–598
Giles, H., Mulac, A., Bradac J., and Johnson, P. (1987). ‘Speech accommodation theory: the first decade and beyond’. In M. McLaughlin (ed.), Communication Yearbook, 10. Beverley Hills: Sage, 13–48CrossRef
Giles, H. and Powesland, P. (1997/1975). ‘Accommodation theory’. In N. Coupland and A. Jaworski (eds.), Sociolinguistics: A Reader. Basingstoke: Macmillan, 232–239. (Reprinted from Giles, H. and Powesland, P. (1975). Speech Style and Social Evaluation. London: Academic Press, 154–170.)
Giles, H. and Powesland, P. F. (1975). Speech Style and Social Evaluation. London: 154–185
Giles, H. and Ryan, E. B. (1982). ‘Prolegomena for developing a social psychological theory of language attitudes’. In Ryan and Giles (eds.): 208–223
Giles, H. and Smith, P. M. (1979). ‘Accommodation theory: optimal levels of convergence’. In H. Giles and R. St. Clair (eds.), Language and Social Psychology. Oxford: Oxford University Press
Gilles, P. (1998a). ‘Virtual convergence and dialect levelling in Luxembourgish’. In P. Auer (ed.), Dialect Levelling and the Standard Varieties in Europe, Folia Linguistica 32: 1–2, 69–82
Gilles, P. (1998b). ‘Die Emanzipation des Lëtzebuergeschen aus dem Gefüge der deutschen Mundarten’, Zeitschrift für deutsche Philologie, 117: 20–35Google Scholar
Gilles, P. (1999). Dialektausgleich im Lëtzebuergeschen: zur phonetisch-phonologischen Fokussierung einer Nationalsprache. Tübingen: Niemeyer
Glauser, B. (2000). ‘The Scottish/English border in hindsight’. In J. Kallen, F. Hinskens and J. Taeldeman (eds.), 65–78CrossRef
Glinka, S., et al. (eds.) (1980). Atlas gwar wschodniosłowiańskich Białostocczyzny [Atlas of East Slavonic dialects of the Białystok region]. Wrocław: PAN
Goebl, H. (2000). ‘Langues standards et dialectes locaux dans la France du Sud-Est et l'Italie septentrionale sous le coup de l'effet-frontière: une approche dialectométrique’, IJSL 145: 181–215CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Goeman, A. C. M. and Taeldeman, J. (1996). ‘Fonologie en morfologie van de Nederlandse dialecten. Een nieuwe materiaalverzameling en twee nieuwe atlasprojecten’, Taal en Tongval 48: 38–59Google Scholar
Golato, A. (2000). ‘An innovative German quotative for reporting on embodied action: Und ich so/und er so “and I'm like/and he's like”, Journal of Pragmatics 32 (1): 29–54CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Goldschmidt, T. (2000). ‘Het succes van een blind, passief proces’, NRC Handelsblad, 15 Dec. 35
Goossens, J. (1962). ‘Die gerundeten Palatalvokale im niederländischen Sprachraum’. Zeitschrift für deutsche Mundartforschung ⅩⅪⅩ: 312–328Google Scholar
Goossens, J. (1970), ‘Niederländische Mundarten vom Deutschen aus gesehen’, Niederdeutsches Wort Band 10: 61–80Google Scholar
Goossens, J. (1974). ‘Historische en moderne taalgeografie’. In A. van Loey and J. Goossens, Historische Dialectologie. Amsterdam: K.N.A.W
Goossens, J. (1977). Deutsche Dialektologie. Berlin/New York: Sammlung Göschen, 2205CrossRef
Goossens, J. (1988). ‘Zur Lage des Niederdeutschen und ihrer Erforschung’, Michigan Germanic Studies 12: 1–20Google Scholar
Gordon, E., Campbell, L., Hay, J., Maclagan, M., Sudbury, A., and Trudgill, P. (2004). New Zealand English: Its Origins and Evolution. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Granovetter, M. (1973). ‘The strength of weak ties’, American Journal of Sociology 78: 1360–1380CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Grassi, C. and Pautasso, M. (1989). Prima roba il parlare … Lingue e dialetti dell'emigrazione biellese. Milan: Electa
Grčević, M. (2002). ‘Some remarks on recent lexical changes in the Croatian language’. In R. Lučić (ed.), Lexical Norm and National Language. Lexicography and Language Policy in South-Slavic Languages after 1989. Munich: Sagner, 150–163
Greenberg, R. (2000). ‘Language politics in the Federal Republic of Yugoslavia: the crisis over the future of Serbian’, Slavic Review 59 (3): 625–640CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Gregersen, F. and Pedersen, I. L. (eds.) (1991a). The Copenhagen Study in Urban Sociolinguistics, Vols. 1–2. Copenhagen: C. A. Reitzel
Gregersen, F. and Pedersen, I. L. (1991b). ‘Copenhagen as a speech community’. In K. L. Berge and U.-B. Kotsinas (eds.), Storstadsspråk och storstadskultur i Norden. Stockholm: Meddelanden från Institutionen för nordiska språk vid Stockholms universitet. MINS 34: 57–69
Gregersen, F. and Pedersen, I. L. (2000). ‘A la Recherche du Word order Not Quite. A methodological progress report’. In S. C. Herring, P. van Reenen, and L. Schøsler (eds.), Textual Parameters in Older Languages. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins, 393–431
Grinjowa, N. M. (1990). ‘Interferenzerscheinungen im grammatischen System einer niederdeutschen Mundart in der Sowjetunion infolge intensiver Sprachkontakte’. Unpublished MS
Grootaers, L. (1942). ‘De aangeblazen h in het oosten van het land’. In Verslagen en Mededelingen van de Koninklijke Vlaamse Academie: 217–225
Großkopf, B., Barden, B., and Auer, P. (1996). ‘Dialektanpassung bei sächsischen “Übersiedlern” – Ergebnisse einer Longitudinalstudie’. In N. Boretzky et al. (eds.), Areale, Kontakte, Dialekte. Bochum: Brockmeyer, 139–166
Grundtvig, S. (1872). Dansk Haandordbog. Med den af Kultusministeriet anbefalede Retskrivning. Copenhagen
Guilfoyle, E. (1986). ‘Hiberno-English: a parametric approach’. In J. Harris, D. Little, and D. Singleton (eds.), Perspectives on the English Language in Ireland. Dublin: CLCS, TCD, 121–132
Gumperz, J. J. (1968). ‘The speech community’. In P. P. Grignioli (ed.), Language and Social Context. Harmondsworth: 219–231
Gumperz, J. J. (ed.) (1982). Language and Social Identity. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Gumperz, J. J. (1997). ‘On the interactional bases of speech community membership’. In G. R. Guy, C. Feagin, D. Schiffrin, and J. Baugh (eds.) (1998), Towards a Social Science of Language. Papers in Honor of William Labov. Vol. Ⅱ. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins, 182–203CrossRef
Gumperz, J. J. and Wilson, R. (1971). ‘Convergence and creolization: a case from the Indo-Aryan/Dravidian border’. In D. H. Hymes (ed.), Pidginization and Creolization of Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 151–168
Guy, G. (1974). ‘Variation in the group and the individual: the case of final stop deletion’, Pennsylvania Working Papers on Linguistic Change and Variation 1 (4): 1–75Google Scholar
Guy, G. (1994). ‘The phonology of variation’. In CLS 30: Papers from the 30th Regional Meeting of the Chicago Linguistic Society. Vol. 2: The Parasession on Variation in Linguistic Theory. Chicago: Chicago Linguistic Society, 133–149
Gvozdanović, J. (in press). ‘Slavische Sprachen an der zweiten Jahrtausendwende’. In T. Berger (ed.), Funktionale Studien zur slavistischen Sprachwissenschaft
Haag, K. (1929–30). ‘Sprachwandel im Lichte der Mundartgrenzen’. Theutonista 6 (1): 1–35Google Scholar
Haas, W. (1978). Sprachwandel und Sprachgeographie. Untersuchungen zur Struktur der Dialektverschiedenheit am Beispiele der schweitzerdeutschen Vokalsysteme. Wiesbaden: Steiner
Haberland, H. (1994). ‘Danish’. In E. König and J. van der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London/New York: 313–348
Haegeman, L. (1988). ‘Register variation in English: some theoretical observations’, Journal of English Linguistics 20 (2): 230–248CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Haegeman, L. (1990). ‘Understood subjects in English diaries’, Multilingua 9: 157–199CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Haegeman, L. (ed.) (1997). The New Comparative Syntax. London: Longman
Haeseryn, W. et al. (1997). Algemene Nederlandse Spraakkunst. Second edition. 2 vols. Groningen: Martinus Nijhoff
Hagen, A. (1982). ‘Schuchardts ideeën over dialectvariatie: betekenis en waarderingsgeschiedenis’. In P. van de Craen and R. Willemyns (eds.), Sociolinguistiek en ideologie. Brussels: 233–261
Hägerstrand, T. (1967). Innovation Diffusion as a Spatial Process. Chicago: University of Chicago Press
Hale, K. and Keyser, S. (1993). ‘On argument structure and the lexical expression of syntactic relations’, in K. Hale and S. Keyser (eds.), The View from Building 20. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 53–110
Hale, M. (1994). ‘Review of Lightfoot 1991’, Language 70: 141–152CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Hannan, K. (1996). Borders of Language and Identity in Teschen Silesia. New York: Peter Lang
Harman, Lesley D. (1988). The Modern Stranger. On Language and Membership. Berlin: Mouton de GruyterCrossRef
Harris, J. (1983). ‘The Hiberno-English I've it eaten construction: what is it and where does it come from?’, Teanga 3: 30–43Google Scholar
Harris, J. (1984). ‘English in the north of Ireland’. In P. J. Trudgill (ed.), Language in the British Isles. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 115–134
Harris, J. (1990). ‘Segmental complexity and phonological government’, Phonology 7: 255–300Google Scholar
Harris, J. (1994). English Sound Structure. Oxford: Blackwell
Harris, J. (1996). ‘Syntactic variation and dialect divergence’. In R. Singh (ed.), Towards a Critical Sociolinguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 31–59CrossRef
Harris, J. and Kaye, J. (1990). ‘A tale of two cities: London glottaling and New York City tapping’, The Linguistic Review 7: 251–274CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Harris, J., Little, D. and Singleton, D. (eds.), Perspectives on the English Language in Ireland. Dublin: Centre for Language and Communication Studies, Trinity College Dublin: 67–81
Hartman Keiser, S., Hinskens, F., Migge, B., and Strand, E. (1997). ‘The Northern Cities Shift in the Heartland? A study of radio speech in Columbus, Ohio’. In K. Ainsworth and D. en M. D'Imperio (eds.), Papers From the Linguistics Laboratory. Ohio State University Working Papers in Linguistics 50: 41–68
Haugen, E. (1966/1972). ‘Dialect, language, nation’. In The Ecology of Language. Essays by Einar Haugen. Selected and introduced by A. S. Dil (1972). Stanford: Stanford University Press, 237–254
Haugen, E. (1976). The Scandinavian Languages. London: Faber & Faber
Hay, J. and Sudbury, A. (2002). ‘The fall and rise of /r/: rhoticity and /r/-sandhi in Early New Zealand English. In Selected Papers from NWAV 30, University of Pennsylvania Working Papers in Linguistics 8.3: 281–295
Henriksen, C. C. (1979). ‘Indføring’. In [reprint of] H. Bertelsen (ed.), Danske Grammatikere, Vols. 1–6. Copenhagen: C. A. Reitzel, Vol. 6: 3*–30*
Henry, A. (1992). ‘Infinitives in a for-to dialect’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory 10: 279–301CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Henry, A. (1994). ‘Singular concord in Belfast English’, Belfast Working Papers in Language and Linguistics 12: 134–176Google Scholar
Henry, A. (1995). Belfast English and Standard English: Dialect Variation and Parameter Setting. Oxford: Oxford University Press
Henry, A. (1996). ‘Indirect questions in Belfast English and the analysis of embedded verb-second’, Belfast Working Papers in Language and Linguistics 13: 161–172Google Scholar
Henry, A. (1997a). ‘The syntax of Belfast English’. In J. Kallen (ed.), Focus on Ireland. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 89–108
Henry, A. (1997b). ‘Viewing change in progress: the loss of V2 in Hiberno-English imperatives’. In van Kemenade and Vincent (eds.): 273–296
Henry, P. L. (1958). ‘A linguistic survey of Ireland: preliminary report’, Lochlann 1: 49–208Google Scholar
Hernández-Campoy, J. (2000). ‘Requisitos teórico-metodológicos para el estudio geolinguístico del dialecto murciano’. In J. M. Jiménez Cano (ed.), Estudios sociolinguísticos del dialecto murciano. Murcia: Universidad de Murcia
Herrgen, J. (1986). Koronalisierung und Hyperkorrektion; das palatale Allophon des /CH/-Phonems und seine Variation im Westmitteldeutschen. Wiesbaden: Steiner
Herson Finn, V. (1996). ‘What is “Nash”? Toward a Theory of Ethnolect in the South Slavic Dialect Continuum’. Unpublished Ph.D. diss. Ohio State University
Hewitt, R. (1986). White Talk, Black Talk: Inter-racial Friendship and Communication amongst Adolescents. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Hickey, R. (1999a). ‘Developments and change in Dublin English’. In E. H. Jahr (ed.), Language Change: Advances in Historical Sociolinguistics. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 209–243
Hickey, R. (1999b). ‘Dublin English: current changes and their motivation’. In P. Foulkes and G. J. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 265–281
Hinskens, F. (1986). ‘Primaire en secundaire dialectkenmerken; een onderzoek naar de bruikbaarheid van een vergeten (?) onderscheid’. In J. Creten, G. Geerts, and K. Jaspaert (eds.), Werk-in-uitvoering; momentopname van de sociolingudstiek in België en Nederland. Leuven/Amersfoort: Acco, 135–158
Hinskens, F. (1992). ‘Dialect levelling in Limburg: structural and sociolinguistics aspects.’ Ph.D. thesis, Nijmegen
Hinskens, F. (1993a). ‘Dialect als lingua franca? Dialectgebruik in het algemeen en bij grensoverschrijdend contact in het Nederrijnland en Twente’. In L. Kremer (ed.), Diglossiestudien. Dialekt und Hochsprache im niederländisch-deutschen Grenzland, Landeskundliches Institut Westmünsterland: Vreden, 209–245
Hinskens, F. (1993b). ‘Dialectnivellering en regiolectvorming; bevindingen en beschouwingen’. In F. Hinskens, C. Hoppenbrouwers, and J. Taeldeman (eds.), Dialectverlies en regiolectvorming (= Taal en tongval 46), 40–61
Hinskens, F. (1996). Dialect Levelling in Limburg: Structural and Sociolinguistic Aspects. Linguistische Arbeiten, Tübingen: Niemeyer
Hinskens, F. (1998a). ‘Dialect levelling: a two-dimensional process’, Folia Linguistica 32: 35–51CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Hinskens, F. (1998b). ‘Variation studies in dialectology and three types of sound change’, Sociolinguistica 12: 155–193CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Hinskens, F. (2001). ‘Koineisation and creole genesis. Remarks on Jeff Siegel's contribution’. In N. Smith and T. Veenstra (eds.), Creolisation and Contact. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: Benjamins, 199–218
Hinskens, F., Kallen, J. L., and Taeldeman, J. (2000). ‘Merging and drifting apart. Convergence and divergence of dialects across political borders’. In J. L. Kallen, F. Hinskens, and J. Taeldeman (eds.), International Journal of the Sociology of Language 145: Convergence and Divergence of Dialects across European Borders. Berlin/New York: 1–28
Hinskens, F. and van Hout, R. (1994). ‘Testing theoretical phonological aspects of word-final t-deletion’. In W. Viereck (ed.), Verhandlungen des Internationalen Dialektologenkongresses Bamberg 1990. Band 3, 197–310
Hinskens, F., van Hout, R., and Wetzels, L. (1997). ‘Balancing data and theory in the study of phonological variation and change.’ In F. Hinskens, R. van Hout, and L. Wetzels (eds.), Variation, Change and Phonological Theory. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: Benjamins, 1–33CrossRef
Hock, H. (1991). Principles of Historical Linguistics. 2nd edn. Berlin: Mouton de GruyterCrossRef
Hock, H. H. and Joseph, B. (1996). Language History, Language Change and Language Relationship. An Introduction to Historical and Comparative Linguistics. Berlin/New York: Mouton De Gruyter
Hoekstra, T. (1992). ‘Aspect and theta theory’, in I. M. Roca (ed.), Thematic Structure. Its role in Grammar. Berlin/New York: Foris, 145–174CrossRef
Hoekstra, T. and Roberts, I. (1993). ‘Middles in Dutch and English’. In E. Reuland and W. Abraham (eds.), Knowledge and Language Vol. Ⅱ, Lexical and Conceptual Structure. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic, 185–222
Hofer, L. (2000). ‘Urban dialects in Basel, Switzerland: variation, change and attitudes’. In J. Fontana, L. McNally, M. Turell, and E. Vallduví (eds.), ICLaVE 1. Proceedings of the first International Conference on Language Variation in Europe. Barcelona: Universitat Pompeu Fabra, 101–109
Hoffman, S. (2002). ‘Are low-frequency complex prepositions grammaticalised? On the limits of corpus data – and the importance of intuitions’
Hofmann, E. (1963). ‘Sprachsoziologische Untersuchungen über den Einfluß der Stadtsprache auf Mundartsprechende Arbeiter’, Marburger Universitätsbund. Jahrbuch 1963. Marburg: 201–281
Hogg, M. A. and Abrams, D. (1988). Social Identifications. A Social Psychology of Intergroup Relations and Group Processes. London/New York: Routledge
Holmberg, A. (1986). Word Order and Syntactic Features in the Scandinavian Languages and in English. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, Stockholm University
Holmes, J. (1994). ‘New Zealand flappers: an analysis of t voicing in New Zealand English’, English World-Wide 15: 195–224CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Holmes, J. (1992). An Introduction to Sociolinguistics. London/New York: Longman
Holmes, J. (1995a). Women, Men and Politeness. Harlow: Longman
Holmes, J. (1995b). ‘Glottal stops in New Zealand English: an analysis of variants of word-final /t/’, Linguistics 33: 433–463CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Holmquist, J. C. (1988). Language Loyalty and Linguistic Variation. A Study in Spanish Cantabria. Dordrecht/Providence: Foris
Hoppenbrouwers, C. (1990). Het regiolect: van dialect tot Algemeen Nederlands. Muiderberg: Coutinho
Hopper, P, and Traugott, E. C. (1993). Grammaticalization. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Hornung, M. (1994). ‘Die sogenannten zimbrischen Mundarten der Sieben und Dreizehn Gemeinden in Oberitalien’. In M. Hornung (ed.), Die deutschen Sprachinseln in den Südalpen: Mundarten und Volkstum. Hildesheim, Zürich, New York. (Studien zur Dialektologie, 3): 19–43
Horvath, B. M. (1985). Variation in Australian English: The Sociolects of Sydney. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Horvath, B. and Horvath, R. (2001). ‘A multilocality study of a sound change in process: the case of /l/ vocalisation in New Zealand and Australian English’, Language Variation and Change 13 (1): 37–57CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Hostrup, C. (1889). Komedier, Vols. 1–3. Copenhagen: Gyldendal
Høysgaard, J. P. (1920) (1747). ‘Accentuered og Raisonnered Grammatica’. In H. Bertelsen (ed.), Danske Grammatikere, Vol. 4. Copenhagen: Gyldendal
Hudson, R. A. (1984). Word Grammar. Oxford: Blackwell
Hudson, R. A. (1985). ‘A psychological and socially plausible theory of language structure’. In D. Schiffrin (ed.), Meaning, Form and Use in Context: Linguistic Applications. Georgetown: Georgetown University Press, 150–159
Hudson, R. A. (1986). ‘Sociolinguistics and the theory of grammar’, Linguistics 24: 1053–1078CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Hudson, R. A. (1990). English Word Grammar. Oxford: Blackwell
Hudson, R. A. (1995). ‘Syntax and sociolinguistics’. In J. Jacobs, A. von Stechow, W. Sternefeld, and T. Vennemann (eds.), Syntax: An International Handbook, Vol. Ⅱ. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter, 1514–1528
Hudson, R. A. (1996). Sociolinguistics. 2nd edn. Cambridge: Cambridge University PressCrossRef
Hudson, R. A. (1997a). ‘Inherent variability and linguistic theory’, Cognitive Linguistics 8: 73–108CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Hudson, R. A. (1997b). ‘The rise of auxiliary DO: verb-non-raising or category-strengthening’, Transactions of the Philological Society 95: 41–72CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Huffines, M. (1989). ‘Case usage among the Pennsylvania German sectarians and nonsectarians’. In N. Dorian (ed.), Investigating Obsolescence. Studies in Language Contraction and Death. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 211–226CrossRef
Huffines, M. (1994). ‘Directionality of language influence: the case of Pennsylvania German and English’. In N. Berend and K. J. Mattheier (eds.), Sprachinselforschung. Eine Gedenkschrift für Hugo Jedig. Frankfurt am Main: 47–58
Hughes, G. A. and Trudgill, P. (1995). English Accents and Dialects. 3rd edn. London: Arnold
Hulk, A. and Cornips, L. (2000). ‘Reflexives in middles and the syntax-semantics interface’. In H. Bennis and M. Everaert (eds.), Interface Strategies. KNAW-series. Amsterdam: Elsevier, 207–222
Hume, [ A.]. (1877–78). ‘Remarks on the Irish dialect of the English language’, Transactions of the Historic Society of Lancashire and Cheshire. 3rd ser., 6: 93–140Google Scholar
Hunnius, K. (1990). ‘Französische Flexionslehre’. In Lexikon der Romanistischen Linguistik (LRL). Hrsgg. v./Edité par Günter Holtus, Michael Metzeltin, Christian Schmitt. Bd./Volume Ⅴ, 1: Französisch. Le français. Tübingen: 59–71
Hutterer, C. J. (1975). Die germanischen Sprachen. Ihre Geschichte in Grundzügen. 2. Aufl. 1987. Budapest
Hutterer, C. J. (1982). ‘Sprachinselforschung als Prüfstand für dialektologische Arbeitsprinzipien’. In W. Besch, U. Knoop, W. Putschke, and H. E. Wiegand (eds.), Dialektologie. Ein Handbuch zur deutschen und allgemeinen Dialektforschung. Halbbd. 2. Berlin/ New York
Hyams, N. (1986). Language Acquisition and the Theory of Parameters. Dordrecht: Reidel
Hyams, N. and Wexler, K. (1993). ‘On the grammatical basis of null subjects in child language’, Linguistic Inquiry 24: 421–459Google Scholar
Hyman, L. M. (1975). Phonology: Theory and Analysis. London: Holt, Rinehart & Winston
Hymes, Dell (1971). ‘Introduction to section Ⅲ’. In D. Hymes (ed.), Pidginisation and Creolisation of Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 65–90
Ihalainen, O. (1991). ‘Periphrastic do in affirmative sentences in the dialect of East Somerset’, in Trudgill and Chambers (eds.): 148–160
Itogi (2000). Itogi perepisi naselenija Respubliki Belarus [Results of the Population Census of the Republic of Belarus]. Minsk: Gosudarstvennyj komitet statistiki Respubliki Belarus’
Ivars, A. M. (1998). ‘Urban colloquial Swedish in Finland’. In P. Auer (ed.), Dialect levelling and the standard varieties in Europe. Folia Linguistica: 32, 1/2, 101–114CrossRef
Jacobsen, H. G. (1973). Sprogrøgt i Danmark i 1930rne og 1940rne. Copenhagen: Gyldendal
Jacobson, S. (1985). ‘Synonymy and hyponymy in syntactic variation’, Papers from the Third Scandinavian Symposium on Syntactic Variation, 7–17
Jacobson, S. (1989). ‘Some approaches to syntactic variation’. In Fasold and Schiffrin (eds.): 381–394CrossRef
Jaeggli, O. (1986). ‘Passive’. Linguistic Inquiry 17: 587–622Google Scholar
Jaeggli, O. and Safir, K. (eds.) (1989). The Null Subject Parameter. Dordrecht: Kluwer
Jahr, E. H. (1988). ‘Social dialect influence in language change: the halting of a sound change in Oslo Norwegian’. In J. Fisiak (ed.), Historical Dialectology: Regional and Social. Berlin/New York/Amsterdam, Mouton de Gruyter: 329–335CrossRef
Jahr, E. H. (1996). Nynorsk språkforskning – en historisk oversikt, in C. Henriksen et al. (eds.), Studies in the Development of Linguistics in Denmark, Finland, Iceland, Norway and Sweden. Oslo: Novus, 84–101
Janich, N. and Greule, A. (eds.) (2002). Sprachkulturen in Europa. Tübingen: Narr
Jaspaert, K. (1986). ‘Statuut en structuur van standaardtalig Vlaanderen’. Ph.D. thesis, University of Leuven
Jaspaert, K. and Kroon S. (1988). ‘The relationship between language attitudes and language choice’. In R. van Hout and U. Knops (eds.), Language Attitudes in the Dutch Language Area. Dordrecht: Foris, 157–171CrossRef
Jedig, H. H. (1966). Laut-und Formenbestand der niederdeutschen Mundart des Altai-Gebietes. (Sitzungsberichte der Sächsischen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Leipzig. Philologisch-historische Klasse, 112/5.) Berlin
Jones, E. and Eyles, J. (1977). An Introduction to Social Geography. Oxford: Oxford University Press
Jørgensen, J. N. (1980). Det flade a vil sejre. Skrifter om anvendt og matematisk lingvistik 7. Copenhagen: Institut for anvendt og matematisk lingvistik, 67–124
Jørgensen, J. N. and Kristensen, K. (1994). Moderne sjællandsk. En undersøgelse af unge sjællænderes talesprog. Copenhagen: C. A. Reitzels Forlag
Jørgensen, J. N. and Kristensen, K. (1995). ‘On boundaries in linguistic continua’. Language Variation and Change 7: 153–168CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Joseph, J. E. (1987). Eloquence and Power. The Rise of Language Standards and Standard Languages. London: Frances Pinter
Kachru, B. B. (1983). The Indianization of English. The English Language in India. Delhi: Oxford University Press
Kaeding, F. W. (1897). Häufigkeitswörterbuch der deutschen Sprache. Festgestellt durch einen Arbeitsausschuss der deutschen Stenographie-Systeme. In 15 Lieferungen. Steglitz bei Berlin
Kahn, D. (1976). ‘Syllable-based Generalizations in English Phonology’. Dissertation, MIT
Kaisse, E. M. (1993). ‘Rule reordering and rule generalization in Lexical Phonology: a reconsideration’. In S. Hargus and E. M. Kaisse (eds.), Studies in Lexical Phonology, Phonetics and Phonology, 4. London: Academic Press, 343–363CrossRef
Kaisse, E. M. and Shaw, P. A. (1985). ‘On the theory of Lexical Phonology’, Phonology Yearbook 2: 1–30CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kallen, J. (1991). ‘Sociolinguistic variation and methodology: after as a Dublin variable’. In J. Cheshire (ed.), English Around the World: Sociolinguistic Perspectives. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 61–74CrossRef
Kallen, J. (1994). ‘English in Ireland’. In R. Burchfield (ed.), The Cambridge History of the English Language, Vol. 5. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 148–196CrossRef
Kallen, J. (ed.) (1997a). Focus on Ireland, Varieties of English around the World, G21. Amsterdam: Benjamins
Kallen, J. (1997b). ‘Irish English: context and contacts’. In J. Kallen (ed.), Focus on Ireland. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 1–33
Kallen, J. (2000). ‘Two languages, two borders, one island: some linguistic and political borders in Ireland. International Journal of the Sociology of Language 145: 29–63CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kallen, J. and Kirk, J. (2001). ‘Convergence and divergence in the verb phrase in Irish Standard English’. In J. Kirk, and D. ÓBaoill (eds.), Language Links: The Languages of Scotland and Ulster. Belfast: Cló Ollscoil na Banríona, 59–79
Kaschuba, W. (1990). ‘German Bürgerlichkeit after 1880. Culture as a symbolic practice. In B. Stråth (ed.), Language and the Construction of Class Identities. Gothenburg: Gothenburg University, 223–252
Katsoyannou, M. and Karyolemou, M. (1998). ‘Structural similarities of unrelated dialects: Calabrese and Greco in contact’. Paper presented at the conference on the ‘Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe’, Reading, 17–19 September
Kaufmann, G. (1997). Varietätendynamik in Sprachkontaktsituationen. Attitüden und Sprachverhalten rußlanddeutscher Mennoniten in Mexiko und den USA. (VarioLingua, 3) Frankfurt am Main
Kayne, R. (1989a). ‘Null subjects and clitic climbing’. In Jaeggli and Safir (eds.): 239–261
Kayne, R. (1989b). ‘Facets of Romance past participle agreement’. In Benincà (ed.): 85–104
Kayne, R. (1994). The Antisymmetry of Syntax. Cambridge, Mass: MIT Press
Keel, W. D. (1994). ‘Reduction and loss of case marking in the noun phrase in German-American language islands: internal development or external interference?’ In N. Berend and K. J. Mattheier (eds.), Sprachinselforschung. Eine Gedenkschrift für Hugo Jedig. Frankfurt am Main: 93–104
Keene, D. (2000). ‘Metropolitan values: migration, mobility and cultural norms, London 1100–1700’. In L. Wright (ed.), The Development of Standard English 1300–1800. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press: 93–116CrossRef
Keller, R. (1994). Sprachwandel. Von der unsichtbaren Hand in der Sprache. Tübingen: Francke/UTB
Kemmer, S. and Barlow, M. (2000). ‘Introduction: a usage-base conception of language’. In M. Barlow and S. Kemmer (eds.), Usage-based Models of Language. Stanford: CSLI Publications, ⅶ–ⅹⅹⅷCrossRef
Kenstowicz, M. (1994). Phonology in Generative Grammar. Oxford: Blackwell
Kerswill, P. E. (1994a). Dialects Converging: Rural Speech in Urban Norway. Oxford: Clarendon
Kerswill, P. E. (1994b). ‘A new dialect in a new city: children's and adult's speech in Milton Keynes’. Final Report. Project founded by the Economic and Social Research Council (1990–1994 R000232376). Reading
Kerswill, P. E. (1996a), ‘Divergence and convergence of sociolinguistic structures in Norway and England’. In P. Auer, F. Hinskens, and K. Mattheier (eds.), Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in Europe (Sociolinguistica 10), 90–104
Kerswill, P. E. (1996b). ‘Children, adults and language change’, Language Variation and Change 8: 177–202CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kerswill, P. E. (2001). ‘Mobility, meritocracy and dialect levelling: the fading (and phasing) out of Received Pronunciation’. In P. Rajame (ed.), British Studies in the New Millennium: Challenge of the Grassroots. Proceedings of the 3rd Tartu Conference on British Studies, University of Tartu, Estonia, August 2000. Also at http://www.universalteacher.org.uk/lang/rp.htm
Kerswill, P. E. (2002a). ‘Koineization and accommodation’. In J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill, N. Schilling-Estes (eds.), The Handbook of Language Variation and Change. Oxford: Blackwell, 669–702
Kerswill, P. E. (2002b). ‘Models of linguistic change and diffusion: new evidence from dialect levelling in British English’. In S. Varlokosta and M. Georgiafentis (eds.), Reading Working Papers in Linguistics 6: 187–216
Kerswill, P. E. (2002c). ‘A dialect with “great inner strength”? The perception of nativeness in the Bergen speech community’. In D. Long and D. Preston (eds.), A Handbook of Perceptual Dialectology, Vol. 2, Amsterdam: Benjamins, 153–173
Kerswill, P. E. (2003). ‘Dialect levelling and geographical diffusion in British English’. In D. Britain and J. Cheshire (eds.), Social Dialectology. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 223–243CrossRef
Kerswill, P. E. (2004). ‘Social dialectology’. In U. Ammon, N. Dittmar, K. Mattheier and P. Trudgill (eds.), Sociolinguistics/Soziolinguistik. An International Handbook of the Science of Language and Society. 2nd edn. Vol. Ⅰ, Berlin: de Gruyter, 22–33
Kerswill, P. E. (2005). ‘Migration and language’. In U. Ammon, K. Mattheier, and P. Trudgill (eds.), Handbook of Sociolinguistics, 2nd edn., Vol. 2. Berlin: de Gruyter
Kerswill, P. E. and Williams, A. (1997). ‘Investigating social and linguistic identity in three British schools’. In U-B Kotsinas, A-B Stenström, and A.-M. Malin (eds.), Ungdomsspråk I Norden. Föredrag från ett forskarsymposium [Youth Language in the Nordic countries: Papers from a research symposium]. Series: MINS, No. 43. Stockholm: University of Stockholm, Department of Nordic Languages and Literature, 159–176
Kerswill, P. E. and Williams, A. (1999). ‘Mobility versus social class in dialect levelling: evidence from new and old towns in England’, Cuadernos de Filologia Inglesa 8: 47–57Google Scholar
Kerswill, P. E. and Williams, A. (2000). ‘Creating a new town koine: children and language change in Milton Keynes’, Language in Society 29(1): 65–115CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kerswill, P. E. and Williams, A. (2002a). ‘“Salience” as an explanatory factor in language change: evidence from dialect levelling in urban England’. In M. C. Jones and E. Esch (eds.), Contact-induced Language Change. An Examination of Internal, External and Non-linguistic Factors. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 81–110
Kerswill, P. E. and Williams, A. (2002b). ‘Dialect recognition and speech community focusing in new and old towns in England: the effects of dialect levelling, demography and social networks’. In D. Long and D. Preston (eds.), A Handbook of Perceptual Dialectology, Vol. 2. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 175–206
Kerswill, P. E. and Williams, A. (2005). ‘New towns and koinéisation: linguistic and social correlates’, Linguistics 43 (5)CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Keyser, S. J. and Roeper, T. (1984). ‘On the middle and ergative constructions in English’, Linguistic Inquiry 15: 381–416Google Scholar
Kikai, A., Schleppegrell, M., and Tagliamonte, S. (1987). ‘The influence of syntactic position on relativization strategies’. In Denning et al. (eds.): 266–277
King, R. D. (1969). Historical Linguistics and Generative Grammar. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall
King, R. and Nadasdi, T. (1996). ‘Sorting out morphosyntactic variation in Acadian French: the importance of the linguistic marketplace’. In Arnold et al. (eds.), 113–128
Kingsmore, R. K. (1995). Ulster Scots Speech: A Sociolinguistic Study. Tuscaloosa: University of Alabama Press
Kiparsky, P. (1968). ‘Linguistic universals and linguistic change’. In E. Bach and R. Harms (eds.), Universals in Linguistic Theory. New York: Holt, 170–202
Kiparsky, P. (1972). ‘Explanation in phonology’. In S. Peters (ed.), Goals of Linguistic Theory. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall, 189–227
Kiparsky, P. (1985). ‘Some consequences of Lexical Phonology’, Phonology Yearbook 2: 85–138CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kiparsky, P. (1992). ‘Analogy’, in W. Bright (ed.), International Encyclopedia of Linguistics. vol. 1. New York: Oxford University Press, 56–61
Kiparsky, P. (1995). ‘The phonological basis of sound change’. In J. Goldsmith (ed.), The Handbook of Phonological Theory. Oxford: Blackwell, 640–670
Kirchner, R. (2000). ‘Geminate inalterability and lenition’, Language 76: 509–545CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kirchner, R. (2001). An Effort Based Approach to Consonant Lenition. London: Routledge
Klausmann, H. (2000). ‘Changes of dialect, code-switching, and new winds of usage: the divergence of dialects along the border between Germany and France in and around the region of the Oberrhein’. In J. Kallen, F. Hinskens, and J. Taeldeman (eds.), 109–130
Klemola, J. (1997). ‘A note on the use of data from non-standard varieties of English in linguistic argumentation’. In R. Hickey and S. Puppel (eds.), Language History, and Linguistic Modelling: Festschrift für Jacek Fisiak. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. 959–967
Kloeke, G. (1927). De Hollandsche expansie in de zestiende en zeventiende eeuw en haar weerspiegeling in de hedendaagsche Nederlandsche dialecten. Proeve eener historisch-dialect-geografische synthese. s-Gravenhage: Nijhoff
Kloss, H. 1967, ‘“Abstand languages” and “Ausbau languages”’, Anthropological linguistics 9 (7), 29–41Google Scholar
Kloss, H. (1980). ‘Deutsche Sprache außerhalb des geschlossenen deutschen Sprachgebiets’. In H. P. Althaus, H. Henne, and H. E. Wiegand (eds.), Lexikon der germanistischen Linguistik. Tübingen: 537–546CrossRef
Knoke, D. and Kuklinski, J. H. (1982). Network Analysis. Beverly Hills, Calif.: Sage
Knowles, G. (1973). Scouse: The Urban Dialect of Liverpool. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, University of Leeds
Kocka, J. (1993). ‘The European pattern and the German case’. In J. Kocka and M. Allen (eds.), Bourgeois Society in Nineteenth-Century Europe. Oxford: Berg, 3–39
Koerner, K. (1989). ‘Toward a history of modern sociolinguistics’. American Speech 66 (1): 57–70CrossRefGoogle Scholar
König, E. and van der Auwera, J. (eds.) (1994). The Germanic Languages. London, New York
König, W. (2001), dtv-Atlas Deutsche Sprache. Munich: Deutscher Taschenbuch Verlag
Koster, J. and May, R. (1982). ‘On the constituency of infinitives’, Language 58: 116–143CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kotsinas, U-B. (1988a). ‘Immigrant children's Swedish – a new variety?’, Journal of Multilingual and Multicultural Development 9, (1/2): 129–140CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kotsinas, U-B. (1988b). ‘Stockholmsspråk i förändring’. In G. Petterson (ed.), Studier i svensk språkhistoria. Lundastudier i nordisk språkvetenskap. Lund: Lund University Press, 133–147
Kotsinas, U-B. (1994). Ungdomsspråk. Uppsala: Hallgren and Fallgren
Kremer, L. (1979). Grenzmundarten und Mundartgrenzen. Köln: Böhlau Verlag
Kremer, L. and Niebaum, H. (eds.) (1990a). Grenzdialekte. Studien zur Entwicklung kontinentalwestgermanischer Dialektkontinua (Germanistische Linguistik 101–103)
Kremer, L. and Niebaum, H. (1990b). Zur Einführung: Grenzdialekte als Gradmesser des Sprachwandels. In Kremer and Niebaum (eds.)
Kristensen, K. (2003). ‘Standard Danish, Copenhagen Sociolects, and regional varieties in the 1900s’. International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 159: 29–44Google Scholar
Kristensen, K. and Thelander, M. (1984). ‘On dialect levelling in Denmark and Sweden’, Folia linguistica 18: 223–246CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kristiansen, T. (1990). Udtalenormering i skolen. Copenhagen: Gyldendal
Kristiansen, T. (1991). ‘Sproglige normidealer på Næstvedegnen. Kvantitative sprogholdningsstudier’. Ph.D. diss., University of Copenhagen
Kristiansen, T. (1996). ‘Det gode sprogsamfund: det norske eksempel’, Nydanske Studier og almen kommunikationsteori 21: 9–22Google Scholar
Kristiansen, T. (1997). ‘Language attitudes in a Danish cinema’. In N. Coupland and A. Jaworski (eds.), Sociolinguistics. A Reader and Coursebook. London: Macmillan, 291–305CrossRef
Kristiansen, T. (1998). ‘The role of standard ideology in the disappearance of the traditional Danish dialects’. Folia Linguistica 32 (1–2): 115–129CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kristiansen, T. (2001). ‘Two standards: one for the media and one for the school’, Language Awareness 10(1): 9–24CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kristiansen, T. (2003). ‘The youth and the gatekeepers: reproduction and change in language norm and variation’. In A. Georgakopoulou and J. K. Androutsopoulos (eds.), Discourse Constructions of Youth Identities. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 279–302CrossRef
Kristiansen, T. (2004). ‘Social meaning and norm-ideals for speech in a Danish community’. In A Jaworski, N. Coupland, and D. Galasinski (eds.), Metalanguage. Social and Ideological Perspectives. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 167–192CrossRef
Kristiansen, V. (1866). Bidrag til en Ordbog over Gadesproget og saakaldt daglig Tale. Copenhagen: H. Hagerup
Kroch, A. S. (1978). ‘Toward a theory of social dialect variation’, Language in Society 7: 17–36CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kroch, A. S. (1980). ‘Resumptive pronouns in English relative clauses’. Paper presented at the LSA Annual Meeting, San Antonio
Kroch, A. S. (1989). ‘Reflexes of grammar in patterns of language change’, Language Variation and Change 1: 199–244CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kroch, A. S. (1994). ‘Morphosyntactic variation’. In Beals et al.(eds.): 180–201
Kroch, A. S. (2001). ‘Syntactic change’. In M. Baltin and C. Collins (eds.), The Handbook of Contemporary Syntactic Theory. Malden: Blackwell, 699–729CrossRef
Kroch, A. S. and Small, C. (1978). ‘Grammatical ideology and its effect on speech’. In D. Sankoff (ed.), Linguistic Variation: Models and Methods, New York: Academic Press, 45–55
Kroch, A. S. and Taylor, A. (1994). ‘The Loss of OV Word Order in Middle English’. Unpublished MS, University of Pennsylvania
Krug, M. G. (2000). Emerging English modals: A Corpus-based Study of Grammaticalization. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter
Kruijsen, J. (1995). ‘Geografische patronen in taalcontact. Romaans leengoed in de Limburgse dialecten van Haspengouw’. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, University of Nijmegen
Kuhn, W. (1934). Deutsche Sprachinsel-Forschung. Geschichte, Aufgaben, Verfahren. Plauen i. Vogtl. (Ostdeutsche Forschungen, 2)
Labelle, M. (1992). ‘Change of state and valency’, Journal of Linguistics 28: 375–414CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Labov, W. (1963). ‘The social motivation of a sound change’, Word 19: 273–309CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Labov, W. (1966). The Social Stratification of English in New York City. Washington, DC: Center for Applied Linguistics
Labov, W. (1969). ‘Contraction, deletion and inherent variability of the English copula’, Language 45: 715–762CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Labov, W. (1972a). Sociolinguistic Patterns. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press
Labov, W. (1972b). Language in the Inner City: Studies in the Black English Vernacular. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press
Labov, W. (1972c). ‘The study of language in its social context’. In W. Labov, Sociolinguistic Patterns. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 183–259
Labov, W. (1972d). ‘Negative attraction and negative concord in English grammar’, Language 48: 773–818CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Labov, W. (1973). ‘The social setting of linguistic change’. In T. A. Sebeok (ed.), Current Trends in Linguistics, Vol. 11, 195–251
Labov, W. (1974). ‘Language change as a form of communication’. In A. Silverstein (ed.), Human Communcation. Hillsdale: Erlbaum, NJ, 221–256
Labov, W. (1975). What is a Linguistic Fact? Lisse: Peter de Ridder Press
Labov, W. (1978). ‘Where does the sociolinguistic variable stop? A reply to B. Lavandera’, Texas Working Papers in Sociolinguistics, 44. Austin: SW Educational Development Laboratory
Labov, W. (1981). ‘Resolving the Neogrammarian controversy’, Language 57: 267–308CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Labov, W. (1984). ‘Field methods of the project on linguistic change and variation’. In J. Baugh and J. Sherzer (eds.), Language in Use. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 28–53
Labov, W. (1989). ‘The child as linguistic historian’, Language Variation and Change 1: 85–94CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Labov, W. (1990). ‘The intersection of sex and social class in the course of linguistic change’. In Language Variation and Change 2, 205–254CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Labov, W. (1991). ‘The boundaries of a grammar: inter-dialectal reactions to positive any more’, in Trudgill and Chambers (eds.): 273–288
Labov, W. (1994). Principles of Linguistic Change, Vol. 1: Internal Factors. Oxford: Blackwell
Labov, W. (1996). ‘When intuitions fail’, Papers from the 32nd Regional Meeting of the Chicago Linguistics Society, 32: 76–106Google Scholar
Labov, W. (1997). ‘Resyllabification’. In F. Hinskens, R. van Hout, and W. L. Wetzels (eds.), Variation, Change and Phonological Theory. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 145–179CrossRef
Labov, W. (2001). Principles of Linguistic Change, Vol. 2: Social Factors. Blackwell: Oxford
Labov, W., Cohen, P., Robins, C., and Lewis, J. (1968). A Study of the Non-standard English of Negro and Puerto-Rican Speakers in New York City. Co-operative Research Report 3288, Vols. Ⅰ and Ⅱ, Philadelphia: US Regional Survey
Labov, W. and Harris, W. (1986). ‘The facto segregation of Black and White vernaculars’. In D. Sankoff (ed.), Diversity and Diachrony. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins, 1–24CrossRef
Landa, A. and Franco, J. (1996). ‘Two issues in null objects in Basque Spanish: morphological decoding and grammatical permeability’. In K. Zagona (ed.), Grammatical Theory and Romance Languages, Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 159–168CrossRef
Landa, A. and Franco, J. (1998). ‘Dialect divergence in Spain and the syntactic stronghold of Basque Spanish’. Paper presented at the ESF conference ‘The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe’, 17–19 September, University of Reading
Lang, E. (1996). ‘Das Deutsche im typologischen Spektrum. Einführung in den Band’. In Deutsch – typologisch. Hrsgg. v. Ewald Lang and Gisela Zifonun. (Institut für deutsche Sprache. Jahrbuch 1995.) Berlin/New York: 7–15
Langacker, R. (1990). Concept, Image and Symbol: The Cognitive Basis of Grammar. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter
Langacker, R. (1994). ‘Cognitive grammar’. In R. Asher (ed.), Encyclopaedia of Language and Linguistics. Oxford: Pergamon Press, 590–593
Lanthaler, F. (1997). ‘Deutsche Varietäten in Südtirol’. In G. Stickel (ed.), Varietäten des Deutschen. Regional-und Umgangssprachen. Berlin: De Gruyter, 364–383
Lass, R. (1980). On Explaining Language Change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Lass, R. and Anderson, J. M. (1975). Old English Phonology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Lausberg, H. (1962). Romanische Sprachwissenschaft, Vol. Ⅲ: Formenlehre. Zweiter Teil. Berlin
Lavandera, B. (1978). ‘Where does the sociolinguistic variable stop?’, Language in Society 7: 171–183CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Lavandera, B. (1984). Variación y Significado. Buenos Aires: Hachette
Le Page, R. (1997). ‘The evolution of a sociolinguistic theory of language’. In F. Coulmas (ed.): 15–32
Page, R. (1980). ‘Projection, focusing, diffusion, or, steps towards a sociolinguistic theory of language, illustrated from the Sociolinguistic Survey of Multilingual Communities, Stages I: Cayo District, Belize (formerly British Honduras), and Ⅱ: St Lucia. York Papers in Linguistics 9: 9–32Google Scholar
Le Page, R. B. and Tabouret-Keller, A. (1985). Acts of Identity: Creole-based Approaches to Language and Ethnicity. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Leahy, D. J. (1915). ‘A Study of English, as Spoken in Cork City’. Unpublished M.A. thesis, University College Cork
Lefèbvre C. (1989). ‘Some problems in defining syntactic variables: the case of WH- questions in Montreal French’. In Fasold and Schiffrin (eds.): 351–366CrossRef
Lemieux, M. (1987). ‘Clitic placement in the history of French’. In Denning et al. (eds.): 278–299
Levelt, W., and Kelter, S. (1982). ‘Surface form and memory in question answering’, Cognitive Psychology 14: 78–106CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Levin, I. (1844). Dansk Lydlære og Dansk Kjønslære. Copenhagen: Samfundet til dansk Literaturs Fremme
Levinson, S. (1988). ‘Conceptual problems in the study of regional and cultural style’. In N. Dittmar and P. Schlobinski (eds.), The Sociolinguistics of Urban Vernaculars. Berlin: de Gruyter, 161–190
Lightfoot, D. W. (1979). Principles of Diachronic Syntax. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Lightfoot, D. W. (1988). ‘Creoles, triggers and universal grammar’. In C. Duncan-Rose and T. Vennemann (eds.), Rhetorica, Pragmatica, Syntactica: A Festschrift for R. P. Stockwell. New York: Routledge, 97–106
Lightfoot, D. W. (1989). ‘The child's trigger experience: degree-0 learnability’, Behavioral and Brain Sciences 12(2): 321–334CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Lightfoot, D. W. (1991). How to Set Parameters: Arguments from Language Change. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press
Lightfoot, D. W. (1996). Language Acquisition and Language Change. Oxford: Blackwell
Lightfoot, D. W. (1999). The Development of Language: Acquisition, Change and Evolution. Oxford: Blackwell
Lightfoot, D. W. and Hornstein, N. (eds.) (1994). Verb Movement. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Lilja, S. (1995). ‘Stockholms befolkningsutveckling före 1800’, Historisk Tidskrift 3: 304–337Google Scholar
Lilja, S. (1996). ‘Stockholm under huvudstädernas sekler. Stockholms befolkningsutveckling i jämförande perspektiv’, Historisk Tidskrift 3: 339–361
Linke, A. (1991). ‘Zum Sprachgebrauch des Bürgertums in 19. Jh’. In R. Wimmer (ed.), Das 19. Jahrhundert. Sprachgeschichtliche Wurzeln des heutigen Deutsch (Ids-Jahrbuch 1990). Berlin/New York: de Gruyter, 250–281
Lippi-Green, R. L. (1989). ‘Social network integration and language change in progress in a rural alpine village’, Language in Society 18: 213–234CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Løkensgard Hoel, O. (1996). Nasjonalisme i norsk målstrid 1848–1865. KULT skriftserie nr. 51. Oslo: Norges forskningsråd
Louden, M. L. (1994). ‘Syntactic change in multilingual language islands’. In N. Berend and K. J. Mattheier, Klaus, J. (eds.), Sprachinselforschung. Eine Gedenkschrift für Hugo Jedig. Frankfurt am Main: 73–91
Lumtzer, V. (1894). Die Leibitzer Mundart. Halle/J. (= H. Paul and W. Braune (eds.) Beiträge zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache und Literatur, 18)
Lund, J. (1996). ‘Guldalderens lyd. Om diktion og hverdagssprog’. In Scaverius, B. (ed.), Guldalderens verden. Copenhagen: Gyldendal: 177–183
Lundén, T. (1973). ‘Interaction across an “open” international boundary: Norway–Sweden’. In Strassoldo, R. (ed.) (1973). Contini e regiono. Trieste: Edizioni LINT. 147–161
Macaulay, R. K. S. (1991). Locating Dialect in Discourse: The Language of Honest Men and Bonnie Lasses in Ayr. New York: Oxford University Press
Macaulay, R. K. S. (2001). ‘You're like “why not?” The quotative expressions of Glasgow adolescents’, Journal of Sociolinguistics 5(1): 3–21CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Macaulay, R. K. S. (2002a). ‘Discourse variation’. In J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill, and N. Schilling-Estes (eds.), Handbook of Language Variation and Change. Malden, Mass., and Oxford: Blackwell, 283–305
Macaulay, R. K. S. (2002b). ‘Extremely interesting, very interesting, or only quite interesting? Adverbs and social class’, Journal of Sociolinguistics 6: 398–417CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Mackey, W. F. (1988). ‘Geolinguistics: its scope and principles’. In C. H. Williams (ed.), Language in Geographic Context. Clevedon: Multilingual Matters, 20–45
MacMahon, M. K. C. (1998). ‘Phonology’. In S. Romaine (ed.), The Cambridge History of the English Language, Vol. 4. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 373–535
Mæhlum, B. (1992). ‘Dialect socialization in Longyearbyen, Svalbard (Spitsbergen): a fruitful chaos’. In E. H. Jahr (ed.), Language Contact and Language Change. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 117–130CrossRef
Mæhlum, B. (1996). ‘Code-switching in Hemnesberget – myth or reality?’, Journal of Pragmatics 25: 749–761CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Mæhlum, B. (1997). Dølamål: dialektene i Bardu og Målselv. Målselv: Målselv Mållag
Mæhlum, B. (2003). ‘Normer’. In Mæhlum et al. (eds.): Språkmøte. Innføring i sosiolingvistikk. Oslo: Cappelen Akademisk Forlag, 86–102
Mæhlum, B. (in press). ‘Sociolinguistic structures chronologically Ⅲ: Norwegian’. In The Nordic Languages. An International Handbook of the History of the North Germanic Language. Vol. 2. Berlin: de Gruyter
Magner, T. (1992). ‘Urban vernaculars and the standard language in Yugoslavia’. In R. Bugarski and C. Hawkesworth (eds.), Language Planning in Yugoslavia. Columbus, Oh.: Slavica Publishers, 189–199
Mak, G. (1998). Hoe God verdween uit Jorwerd. Een Nederlands dorp in de twintigste eeuw. Amsterdam/Antwerp: Atlas
Marcato, G., Ursini, F., and Politi, A. (1974). Dialetto e italiano. Status socioeconomico e percezione sociale del fenomeno linguistico. Pisa: Pacini
Marshall, J. (2004). Language Change and Sociolinguistics. Rethinking Social Networks. Basingstoke: Palgrave MacmillanCrossRef
Maschler, Y. (2002). ‘On the grammaticalization of ke'ilu “like”, lit. “as if”, in Hebrew talk-in-interaction’, Language in Society 31: 243–276CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Matras, Y. (2001). ‘Identifying and explaining convergent processes’, talk delivered at the 23rd Annual Meeting of the German Linguistics Society (DGfS), Leipzig, 28 February–1 March
Mattheier, K. (1980). Pragmatik und Soziologie der Dialekte; Einführung in die kommunikative Dialektologie des Deutschen. Heidelberg
Mattheier, K. (1991). ‘Standardsprache als Sozialsymbol’. In R. Wimmer (Hrg.) Das 19. Jahrhundert. Sprachgeschichtliche Wurzeln des heutigen Deutsch. Berlin/New York: IdS Jahrbuch 1990: 41–72
Mattheier, K. (1996). ‘Varietätenkonvergenz. Überlegungen zu einem Baustein einer Theorie der Sprachvariation’. In P. Auer, F. Hinskens, and K. Mattheier (eds.), Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in Europe (Sociolinguistica 10), 31–52CrossRef
Mattheier, K. (1997). ‘Methoden der Sprachinselforschung’. In H. Goebl, P. H. Nelde, Z. Stary, and W. Wölck (eds.), (1996/97). Kontaktlinguistik/Contact linguistics/Linguistique de contact. Ein internationales Handbuch zeitgenössischer Forschung. An international handbook of contemporary research. Manuel international des recherches contemporaines. Halbbd. 1. Berlin/New York: 812–819
Mazur, J. (1996). ‘Konvergenz und Divergenz in den polnischen Sprachvarietäten’. In P. Auer, F. Hinskens, and K. Mattheier (eds.), Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in Europe (Sociolinguistica 10), 53–74CrossRef
McCafferty, K. (1998). ‘Shared accents, divided speech community? Change in Northern Ireland English’, Language Variation and Change, 10(2): 97–121CrossRefGoogle Scholar
McCloskey, J. (1991). ‘Clause structure, ellipsis and proper government in Irish’, Lingua 85: 259–302CrossRefGoogle Scholar
McCloskey, J. (1992). ‘Adjunction, selection and embedded verb second’, Working Paper LRC-92–07. Linguistics Research Center, University of California at Santa Cruz
McCloskey, J. and Hale, K. (1984). ‘On the syntax of person-number inflection in Modern Irish’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory: 1, 487–533Google Scholar
McConvell, P. (1988). ‘Mix-im-up: aboriginal codeswitching, old and new’, in M. Heller (ed.), Codeswitching. Anthropological and Sociolinguistic Perspectives. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 97–149CrossRef
McMahon, A. M. S. (1995). Understanding Language Change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Meechan, M. and Foley, M. (1994). ‘On resolving disagreement: linguistic theory and variation – There's bridges’, Language Variation and Change 6: 63–85CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Mees, I. (1987). ‘Glottal stop as a prestigious feature in Cardiff English’, English World-Wide 8: 25–39CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Mesthrie, R. (1992). Language in Indenture: A Sociolinguistic History of Bhojpuri-Hindi in South Africa. London: Routledge
Meyerhoff, M. (2002). ‘Communities of practice’. In J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill, and N. Schilling-Estes (eds.), The Handbook of Language Variation and Change. Oxford: Blackwell, 526–548
Mhac an Fhailigh, É. (1968). The Irish of Erris, Co. Mayo. Dublin: Dublin Institute for Advanced Studies
Miller, J. (1993). ‘The grammar of Scottish English’, in Milroy and Milroy (eds.): 99–138
Miller, J. and Brown, K. (1982). ‘Aspects of Scottish English syntax’, English World-Wide 3: 3–17CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Milroy, J. (1992). Linguistic Variation and Change. Oxford: Blackwell
Milroy, J. (2000). ‘Historical description and the ideology of the standard language’. In L. Wright (ed.), The Development of Standard English 1300–1800. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press: 11–28CrossRef
Milroy, J. and Milroy, L. (1985a). Authority in Language. Investigating Language Prescription and Standardization. London: Routledge
Milroy, J. and Milroy, L. (1985b). ‘Linguistic change, social network and speaker innovation’, Journal of Linguistics 21: 339–384CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Milroy, J. and Milroy, L. (1993/1998). ‘Mechanisms of change in urban dialects: the role of class, social network and gender’, International Journal of Applied Linguistics 3: 57–78. Reprinted in P. Trudgill and J. Cheshire (eds.), The Sociolinguistic Reader Ⅰ (1998): 179–195
Milroy, J. and Milroy, L. (1997). ‘Varieties and variation’. In F. Coulmas (ed.), The Handbook of Sociolinguistics. Oxford: Blackwell, 47–64
Milroy, J., Milroy, L., and Hartley, S., (1994). ‘Local and supra-local change in British English: the case of glottalisation’, English World-Wide 15: 1–33CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Milroy, J., Milroy, L., Hartley, S., and Walshaw, D. (1994). ‘Glottal stops and Tyneside glottalization: competing patterns of variation and change in British English’, Language Variation and Change 6: 327–358CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Milroy, L. (1980). Language and Social Networks. Oxford: Blackwell
Milroy, L. (1982). ‘Social network and linguistic focusing’. In S. Romaine (ed.) (1982), Sociolinguistic Variation in Speech Communities. London: Edward Arnold, 141–153
Milroy, L. (1984a). ‘What a performance! Some problems with the competence-performance distinction’. In R. Hawkins and J. Harris (eds.), Sheffield Working Papers in Linguistics. Sheffield: University of Sheffield, 40–55 (also published in 1985 with the same title in Australian Journal of Linguistics 51: 1–17)
Milroy, L. (1984b). ‘Comprehension and context: successful communication and communicative breakdown’, in P. J. Trudgill (ed.), Applied Sociolinguistics. London: Academic Press, 7–31
Milroy, L. (1986). ‘Questions and answers; an analysis of the discourse structure of interviews’. In Harris, J., Little, D. and Singleton, D. (eds.), Perspectives on the English Language in Ireland. Dublin: Centre for Language and Communication Studies, Trinity College, Dublin, 49–63
Milroy, L. (1987a). Observing and Analysing Natural Language. Oxford: Blackwell
Milroy, L. (1987b). Language and Social Networks. 2nd edn. Oxford: Blackwell
Milroy, L. (1992). ‘New perspectives in the analysis of sex differentiation in language’. In K. Bolton and H. Kwok (eds.), Sociolinguistics Today. International Perspectives. London/New York: Routledge, 163–179
Milroy, L. (1996). ‘Review of Henry (1995)’, Language in Society 25: 471–475CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Milroy, L. (1999). ‘Standard English and language ideology in Britain and the United States’. In Bex and Watts: 173–206
Milroy, L. (2002a). ‘Introduction: mobility, contact and language charge – working with contemporary speech communities?Journal of Sociolinguistics, 6(1): 3–15CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Milroy, L. (2002b). ‘Social networks’. In J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill, and N. Schilling-Estes (eds.), The Handbook of Language Variation and Change. Oxford: Blackwell: 550–572
Milroy, L. and Gordon, M. (2003). Sociolinguistics. Method and Interpretation. Oxford: BlackwellCrossRef
Milroy, L. and Margrain, S. (1980). ‘Vernacular language loyalty and social network’. In Language in Society 9: 43–70CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Milroy, L. and Milroy, J. (1992). ‘Social network and social class: towards an integrated sociolinguistic model’, Language in Society 21(1): 1–26CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Milroy, L. and Milroy, J. (eds.) (1993). Real English: The Grammar of English Dialects in the British Isles. London: Longman
Minervini, L. (1998). ‘Dialect convergence in the formation of Judeo-Spanish (16th cent.)’. Paper presented at the conference on The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe, Reading, 17–19 September
Mitchell, J. C. (ed.) (1969). Social Network in Urban Situations. Manchester: Manchester University Press
Mitzka, W. (1922). ‘Dialektgeographie der Danziger Nehrung’. In Zeitschrift für deutsche Mundarten
Møller, J. and Quist, P. (2003). ‘Research on youth and language in Denmark’, International Journal of the Sociology of Language 159: 57–72Google Scholar
Mondéjar, J. (1991). ‘Andaluz’. In Lexikon der Romanistischen Linguistik Ⅵ. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer, 430–446
Montoya Abad, B. (1995). ‘L'observació del canvi fonologic en el català balear’, in M. T. Turrell Julià (ed.), La sociolingüitica de la variació. Barcelona (PPU), 165–219
Moore, G. (1990). ‘Structural determinants of men's and women's personal networks’, American Sociological Review 55: 726–735CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Moreno Fernández, F. (1996). ‘Metodología del “Proyecto para el estudio sociolingüístico del español de España y de América’ (PRESEEA), Lingüística 8: 257–287Google Scholar
Moretti, M. (1988). La differenziazione interna di un continuum dialettale. Indagine a Cevio (TI). Zurich: Zentralstelle der Studentenschaft
Mugglestone, L. (1995). ‘Talking Proper’. The Rise of Accent as Social Symbol. Oxford: Oxford University Press
Mühlhäusler, P. (1997). Pidgin and Creole Linguistics. Expanded and revised edition. London: University of Westminster Press
Mummendey, A. (1999). ‘Gesellschaftlicher Umbruch und soziale Identität. Sozialpsychologische Perspektiven’. Talk delivered to the SFB 417, Universität Leipzig, 24 November 1999
Münstermann, H. and van Hout, R. (1986). ‘Taalattitudes contra geschiktheid en gebruik’. In J. Creten, G. Geerts, and K. Jaspaert (eds.), Werk-in-uitvoering; momentopname van de sociolinguïstiek in België en Nederland. Leuven/Amersfoort: Acco, 235–248
Muysken, P. (1981). ‘Halfway between Spanish and Quechua: the case for relexification’. In A. Highfield and A. Valsman (eds.), Historicity and Variation in Creole Studies. Ann Arbor: Karoma, 52–78
Muysken, P. (1989). ‘The morphology/syntax interface in Quechua dialectology’. In Benincà (ed.): 41–52
Muysken, P. (1995). ‘Ottersum revisited: style shifting and code-switching’. Paper presented at the Dutch Tweede Sociolinguïstische Conferentie, 18–19 May, 1995, Lunteren, The Netherlands
Muysken, P. (1999a). ‘Three processes of borrowing: borrowability revisited’. In G. Extra and L. Verhoeven (eds.), Bilingualism and Migration. Berlin/New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 229–246
Muysken, P. (1999b). Talen. De Toren van Babel. Amsterdam: Amsterdam University Press
Muysken, P. (2000). ‘Radical modularity and the possibility of sociolinguistics’. Paper presented at the Sociolinguistics Symposium 2000, 27–29 April, University of the West of England, Bristol
Muysken, P. and Smith, N. (1995). ‘The study of pidgin and creole languages’. In J. Arends, P. Muysken, and N. Smith (eds.), Pidgins and Creoles. An Introduction. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 3–14
Muysken, P. and Veenstra, T. (1995). ‘Universalist approaches’. In J. Arends, P. Muysken, and N. Smith (eds.), Pidgins and Creoles. An Introduction. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 121–134
Myers-Scotton, C. (1993). Duelling Languages. Grammatical Structure in Codeswitching. Oxford: Clarendon Press
Myers-Scotton, C. (1997). ‘“Matrix language recognition” and “morpheme sorting” as possible structural strategies in pidgin/creole formation’. In A. K. Spears and D. Winford (eds.), The Structure and Status of Pidgins and Creoles. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: Benjamins, 151–174
Myers-Scotton, C. (1999). ‘Compromise structural strategies in codeswitching’. In G. Extra and L. Verhoeven (eds.), Bilingualism and Migration. Berlin/New York: de Gruyter, 211–227CrossRef
Naro, A. (1981). ‘The social and structural dimensions of a syntactic change’, Language 57: 63–98CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Nelde, P. (2001). ‘Die neue Mehrsprachigkeit – Perspektiven einer europäischen Sprachpolitik’. Inaugural address upon the accession to the ‘Leibnizprofessur’ at the University of Leipzig
Nespor, M. and Vogel, I. (1986). Prosodic Phonology. Dordrecht/Riverton: Foris
Nesse, A. (1998). ‘Determining linguistic contacts in the past: the case of Low German and Bergen Norwegian’. Paper presented at the conference on The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe, Reading, 17–19 September
Newbrook, M. (1999). ‘West Wirral: norms, self-reports and usage’. In P. Foulkes and G. J. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 90–106
Newton, B. (1972). The Generative Interpretation of Dialect. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Niebaum, H. (1990). ‘Staatsgrenze als Bruchstelle? Die Grenzdialekte zwischen Dollart und Vechtegebiet’. In Kremer and Niebaum (eds.): 49–83
Niedzielski, N. and Giles, H. (1996). ‘Linguistic accommodation’. In H. Goebl et al. (eds.), Kontaktlinguistik – Ein internationales Handbuch zeitgenössischer Forschung, Vol. 1(1), 332–342
Nielsen, N. Å. (1952). ‘Abrahamsons og Todes oplysninger om rigsmålsudtalen omkring 1800’. In Sprog og Kultur, Vol. 19: 33–57
Nishida, C. (1994). ‘The Spanish reflexive clitic se as an aspectual class marker’, Linguistics 32: 425–458CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Nortier, J. (2001). Murks en straattaal. Vriendschap en taalgebruik onder jongeren. Amsterdam: Prometheus
Nöth, D. (1994). ‘Spuren der verlernten Muttersprache? Beobachtungen zum Artikelgebrauch beim Sprachwiedererwerb von Rußlanddeutschen’. Unpublished MS. Berlin
Nyman, L. (1997). ‘Einige Beobachtungen zu Varietäten und Varietätenausgleich im Niederdeutsch der Orenburger Rußland-Mennoniten’. In Historische Soziolinguistik des Deutschen Ⅲ. Sprachgebrauch und sprachliche Leistung in sozialen Schichten und soziofunktionalen Gruppen. Internationale Fachtagung Rostock/Kühlungsborn 15.–18.9.1996. Hrsgg. v. Gisela Brandt. Stuttgart: 261–276
Ó Baoill, D. P. (1990). ‘Language contact in Ireland: the Irish phonological substratum in Irish-English’. In G. A. Edmondson et al. (eds.), Development and Diversity: Language Variation across Time and Space. Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics and University of Texas at Arlington, 147–172
Ó Baoill, D. P. (1997). ‘The emerging Irish phonological substratum in Irish English’. In J. Kallen (ed.), Focus on Ireland. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 73–87CrossRef
Ó Cuív, B. (1944). The Irish of West Muskerry, Co. Cork. Dublin: Dublin Institute for Advanced Studies
Ó Curnáin, B. (1998). ‘Polygenesis of a third plural pronoun in West Galway Irish’. Paper presented at the ESF Conference: The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe, 17–19 September, University of Reading
Odlin, T. (1989). Language Transfer: Cross-Linguistic Influence in Language Learning. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Omdal, H., (1977). ‘Høyangermålet – en ny dialekt’, Språklig Samling 18: 7–9Google Scholar
Omdal, H., (1994). ‘From the valley to the city: language modification and language attitudes’. In B. Nordberg (ed.), The Sociolinguistics of Urbanization. The Case of the Nordic Countries. Berlin: de Gruyter, 116–148CrossRef
Orton, H., Dieth, E., and Wakelyn, M. (1968). The Survey of English Dialects, Vol. 4 (the Southern Counties). Leeds: E. J. Arnold
Paardekooper, P. (2001). ‘Hoe zacht is saft?Onze taal 6: 153Google Scholar
Paasi, A. (1996). Territories, Boundaries and Consciousness: The Changing Geographies of the Finnish–Russian Border. New York: Wiley
Pandeli, H., Eska, J. F., Ball, M. J., and Rahilly, J. (1997). ‘Problems of phonetic transcription: the case of the Hiberno-English slit-t’, Journal of the International Phonetic Association 27: 65–75CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Paolillo, J. C. (1997). ‘Sinhala diglossia: discrete or continuous variation?’, Language in Society 26(2): 269–296CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Pardy, A. (1987). ‘To examine the distribution of the sociolinguistic variable (t) across different contexts’. Unpublished project report, School of Clinical Speech and Language Studies, Trinity College Dublin
Parodi, C., Quicoli, C., Saltarelli, M., and Zubizareta, M. L. (eds.) (1996). Aspects of Romance Linguistics. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press
Patrick, P. (2002). ‘The speech community’. In J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill, and N. Schilling-Estes (eds.), Handbook of Language Variation and Change. Oxford: Blackwell
Paul, H. (1870/5th edn. 1920). Prinzipien der Sprachgeschichte. 5e Auflage. Halle: Niemeyer
Pautasso, M. ‘“Competenza sbilanciata” e parlato narrativo: passaggi di codice e enunciati mistilingui in emigrati biellesi di ritorno’. In G. Berruto and A. A. Sobrero (eds.), Studi di sociolinguistica e dialettologia italiana offerti a Corrado Grassi, Galatina, Congedo: 123–150
Pearce, E. (1995). ‘Diachronic change and negation in French’. In L. Haegeman (ed.), Rivista di Linguistica (thematic issue) The Syntax of Sentential Negation, 301–328
Pedersen, I. L. (1996). ‘Regionalism and linguistic change’. In P. Auer, F. Hinskens, and K. Mattheier (eds.), Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in Europe (Sociolinguistica 10), 75–89CrossRef
Pedersen, I. L. (1997). ‘Sprogarter og sprogforandring i 1800-tallet’. In P. Widell and M. Kunøe (eds.), 6. Møde om Udforskningen af Dansk Sprog til minde om Peter Skautrup 1896–1996. Århus: Institut for Nordisk Sprog og Litteratur, 237–245
Pedersen, I. L. (1998). ‘Stylistic convergence and social divergence: on the emergence of socially stratified spoken standards in the Nordic countries’. Paper presented at the conference on The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe, Reading, 17–19 September
Pedersen, I. L. (2000). ‘Urban and rural dialects of Slesvig: political boundaries in the millenial retreat of Danish in Slesvig’. In J. Kallen, F. Hinskens, and J. Taeldeman (eds.), Dialect Convergence and Divergence Across European Borders = International Journal of the Sociology of Language 145: 131–151
Pedersen, I. L. (2001). ‘Bymålenes stilling i Danmark’. In M. Saari (ed.), Våra språk i tid och rum. Helsingfors: Institutionen för nordiska språk och litteratur, 169–180
Pedersen, I. L. (2003). ‘Traditional dialects of Danish and the de-dialectalization 1900–2000’, International Journal of the Sociology of Language 159: 9–28Google Scholar
Pedersen, I. L. (in press). ‘Sociolinguistic structures chronologically I: Danish’. In The Nordic Languages. An International Handbook of the History of the North Germanic Languages. Vol. 2. Berlin: de Gruyter
Pedersen, K. M. (1999). ‘Genusforenklingen i københavnsk’, Danske Folkemål 41: 79–106Google Scholar
Pellegrini, G. B. (1972). ‘La classificazione delle lingue romanze e i dialetti italiani’. In G. B. Pellegrini (ed.), Saggi sul ladino dolomitico e sul friulano, Adriatica: Bari, 239–268
Peterson, J. (1996). ‘Sociolinguistic interviewer style variation: hyperconvergence in the other informant’. In M. Meyerhoff (ed.), (N) WAVES and MEANS: A Selection of Papers from NWAVE 24 = University of Pennsylvania Working Papers in Linguistics 3(1): 159–170
Pierce, A. (1992). Language Acquisition and Syntactic Theory. Dordrecht: Kluwer
Pinker, S. (1994). The Language Instinct: How the Mind Creates Language. New York: Harper-Collins
Pintzuk, S. (1991). ‘Phrase Structures in Competition: Variation and Change in Old English Word Order’. Unpublished Ph.D. diss., University of Pennsylvania
Pintzuk, S. (1993). ‘Verb seconding in Old English: verb movement to INFL’, The Linguistic Review 10: 5–35CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Pizzolotto, G. (1991). Bilinguismo ed emigrazione in Svizzera. Italiano e commutazione di codice in un gruppo di giovani. Bern: Lang
Platzack, C. (1987). ‘The Scandinavian languages and the null subject parameter’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory 5: 377–401CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Poeppel, D., and Wexler, K. (1993). ‘The full competence hypothesis of clause structure in early German’, Language 69: 1–33CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Pohl, J. (1978). ‘Communication field and linguistic field: the influence of the border (France and Belgium) on the French Language’, International Journal of the Sociology of Language 15: 85–90CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Polenz, P. von (1999). Deutsche Sprachgeschichte vom Spätmittelalter bis zur Gegenwart. Bd. 3. 19. und 20. Jahrhundert. Berlin/New York: de Gruyter
Policansky, L. (1976). ‘Syntactic variation in Belfast English’, Belfast Working Papers in Language and Linguistics 5: 217–231Google Scholar
Policansky, L. (1982). ‘Grammatical variation in Belfast English’, Belfast Working Papers in Language and Linguistics 6: 37–66Google Scholar
Pollard, C. and Sag, I. (1987). Information-based Syntax and Semantics. Stanford: CSLI
Pop, S. (1950). La dialectologie. Aperçu historique et méthodes d'enquêtes linguistiques. Première partie: dialectologie Romane. Louvain: ‘Chez l'auteur’
Poplack, S. (1980). ‘“Sometimes I'll start a sentence in English y termino en español”: toward a typology of code-switching’, Linguistics 18: 581–618CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Poplack, S. and Tagliamonte, S. (1996). ‘Nothing in context: variation, grammaticization and past time marking in Nigeria Pidgin English’. In P. Baker (ed.), Changing Meanings, Changing Functions. London: University of Westminster Press, 71–94
Potter, J. and Wetherell, M. (1987). Discourse and Social Psychology: Beyond Attitudes and Behaviour. London: Sage
Preston, D. (1996). ‘Whaddayaknow?: the modes of folk linguistic awareness’, Language Awareness 5(1): 40–74CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Preston, D. (ed.) (1999). Handbook of Perceptual Dialectology. Vol. 1. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John BenjaminsCrossRef
Prince, E. (1992). ‘The ZPG letter: subjects, definiteness and information status’. In William C. Mann and Sandra A. Thompson (eds.), Discourse Description: Diverse Linguistic Analyses of a Fundraising Text. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 295–325CrossRef
Pulleyblank, D. (1997). ‘Optimality Theory and features’. In D. Archangeli and D. T. Langendoen (eds.), Optimality Theory: An Overview. Oxford: Blackwell, 59–101
Quirk, R., Greenbaum, S., Leech, G., and Srantrik, J. (1995). A Grammer of Contemporary English. Harlow: Longman
Radford, A. (1990). Syntactic Theory and the Acquisition of English Syntax. Oxford: Blackwell
Radford, A., Atkinson, M., Britain, D., Clahsen, H., and Spencer, A. (1999). Linguistics: An Introduction. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Ramge, H. (1982). Dialektwandel im mittleren Saarland. Saarbrücken: Veröffentlichungen des Instituts für Landeskunde im Saarland – Band 30
Rampton, B. (1995). Crossing: Language and Ethnicity among Adolescents. Harlow: Longman
Rein, K. (1994). ‘Die Geschichte rußlanddeutscher Täufergruppen in Amerika und ihre Bedeutung für die Sprachinsel-und Sprachkontaktforschung’. In N. Berend and K. J. Mattheier (eds.), Sprachinselforschung: eine Gedenkschrift für Hugo Jedig. Frankfurt am Main: 193–203
Reitan, J. (1928). ‘Oplysninger om målet i Bardo og Målselven’, Maal og Minne 1928: 1–35Google Scholar
Requena, F. (1995). ‘Determinantes estructurales de las redes sociales en los hombres y las mujeres’. Papers 45 (1995): 33–41
Requena, F. (1996). Redes sociales y cuestionarios. Madrid: CIS
Rickford, J. (1987). The haves and have nots: sociolinguistic surveys and the assessment of speaker competence. Language in Society: 16(2): 149–177CrossRef
Rickford, J. (1988). ‘Connections between sociolinguistics and pidgin-creole studies’, International Journal of the Sociology of Language 71: 51–57Google Scholar
Rickford, J., Mendoza-Denton, N., Wasow, T., and Espinoza, J. (1995). ‘Syntactic variation and change in progress: loss of the verbal coda in topic-restricting as far as constructions’, Language 71: 102–131CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Riehl, C. (2001). ‘Das Deutsche im Sprachkontakt: individuelle und universelle Entwicklungstendenzen’. Paper presented at the 23rd Jahrestagung of the Deutsche Gesellschaft für Sprachwissenschaft. Leipzig, March
Rizzi, L. (1991). ‘Residual verb second and the wh-criterion’, Technical Reports in Formal and Computational Linguistics, 2, University of Geneva
Roberts, I. G. (1985). ‘Agreement parameters and the development of English modal auxiliaries’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory 3: 21–57CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Roberts, I. G. (1993). Verbs and Diachronic Syntax: A Comparative History of English and French. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic
Roberts, I. G. (1997). ‘Directionality and word order change in the history of English’. In van Kemenade and Vincent (eds.): 397–426
Robertson, R. (1993). Globalization. Social Theory and Global Culture. Repr. London: Sage
Roeper, T. and Weissenborn, J. (1990). ‘How to make parameters work: comments on Valian’. In L. Frazier and J. de Villiers (eds.), Language Processing and Language Acquisition. Dordrecht: Kluwer, 147–162CrossRef
Rogier, D. (1994). ‘De verspreiding van een sociaal hooggewaardeerd taalkenmerk: de huig-R rond Gent’, Taal en Tongval, themanummer 7: R-zes visies op een kameleon: 45–53
Romaine, S. (1980a). ‘The relative clause marker in Scots English: diffusion, complexity and style as dimensions of syntactic change’, Language in Society 9: 221–247CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Romaine, S. (1980b). ‘A critical overview of the methodology of urban British sociolinguistics’, English World Wide 1(2): 163–198CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Romaine, S. (1980c). ‘On the problem of syntactic variation: a reply to Beatriz Lavandera and William Labov’. Working Papers in Sociolinguistics 82. Austin, Texas: South-West Educational Development Laboratory
Romaine, S. (1981). ‘Syntactic complexity, relativization and stylistic levels in Middle Scots’, Folia Linguistica Historica 2: 56–77CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Romaine, S. (1982a). Socio-historical Linguistics: Its Status and Methodology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Romaine, S. (1982b). ‘What is a speech community?’ In S. Romaine (ed.), Sociolinguistic Variation in Speech Communities. London: Edward Arnold, 13–24
Romaine, S. (1984a). ‘Relative clauses in child language, pidgins and creoles’, Australian Journal of Linguistics 4: 257–281CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Romaine, S. (1984b). ‘The status of sociological models and categories in explaining linguistic variation’, Linguistiche Berichte 90: 25–80Google Scholar
Romaine, S. (1984c). ‘On the problem of syntactic variation and pragmatic meaning in sociolinguistic theory’, Folia Linguistica 18: 409–437CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Romaine, S. (1989a). ‘Pidgins, creoles, immigrant and dying languages’. In N. Dorian (ed.), Investigating Obsolescence. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 369–384
Romaine, S. (1989b). Bilingualism. Oxford: Blackwell
Romaine, S. (1998). ‘Introduction’. In S. Romaine (ed.), The Cambridge History of the English Language, vol. Ⅳ 1776–1997. Cambridge: Cambridge University PressCrossRef
Rosenberg, P. (1994a). ‘Varietätenkontakt und Varietätenausgleich bei den Rußlanddeutschen: Orientierungen für eine moderne Sprachinselforschung’. In N. Berend and K. J. Mattheier (eds.), Sprachinselforschung: eine Gedenkschrift für Hugo Jedig. Frankfurt am Main: 123–164
Rosenberg, P. (1994b). ‘Sprachgebrauchsstrukturen und Heterogenität der Kommunikationsgemeinschaft bei den Deutschen in der GUS – eine empirische Studie’. In P.-P. König and H. Wiegers (eds.), Satz – Text – Diskurs. Akten des 27. Linguistischen Kolloquiums, Münster 1992. Bd. 2. Tübingen: 287–298
Rosenberg, P. (1997). ‘Die Sprache der Deutschen in Rußland’. In G. Stricker (ed.), Deutsche Geschichte im Osten Europas. Ruβland. Berlin: Siealer, 585–608
Rosenberg, P. (1998). ‘Deutsche Minderheiten in Lateinamerika’. In Particulae particularum. Festschrift zum 60. Geburtstag von Harald Weydt. Herausgegeben von Theo Harden und Elke Hentschel. Tübingen: 261–291
Rosewarne, D. (1984). ‘Estuary English’, Times Educational Supplement 42, 19 October
Røyneland, U. (2000). ‘Is age-grading always a potential problem in apparent time studies?’ In J. Fontana, L. McNally, M. Turell, and E. Vallduví (eds.), ICLaVE 1. Proceedings of the First International Conference on Language Variation in Europe. Barcelona, Universitat Pompeu Fabra, 187–196
Rumley, D. and Minghi, J. (eds.) (1991). The Geography of Border Landscapes. London: Routledge
Russell, P. (1995). An Introduction to the Celtic Languages. London: Longman
Russo, M., and Roberts, J. (1999). ‘Linguistic change in endangered dialects: the case of alternation between avoir and être in Vermont French’, Language Variation and Change 11(1): 19–41CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Ryan, E. B. and Giles, H. (eds.) (1982). Attitudes Towards Language. Social and Applied Contexts. London: Edward Arnold
Ryckeboer, H. (2000). ‘The role of political borders in the millenial retreat of Dutch (Flemish) in the north of France’. In J. Kallen, F. Hinskens, and J. Taeldeman (eds.), 79–108
Sadowski, A. (1995). Pogranicze polsko-białoruskie: tożsamość mieszkańców [The identity of the inhabitants of the Polish–Belarusian border region]. Białystok: Transhumana
Sahlins, P. (1989). Boundaries: The Making of France and Spain in the Pyrenees. Berkeley: University of California Press
Salmons, J. (1994). ‘Naturalness and morphological change in Texas German’. In N. Berend and K. J. Mattheier (eds.), Sprachinselforschung. Eine Gedenkschrift für Hugo Jedig. Frankfurt am Main: 59–72
Samuels, M. (1972). Linguistic Evolution – with Special Reference to English. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Sándor, K. (1998). ‘Political changes as an accelerating factor in syntactic change in varieties of Hungarian’. Paper presented at the ESF conference The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe, 17–19 September, University of Reading
Sandøy, H. (1998a). ‘Talenorm i NRK’. In R. Vatvedt Fjeld and B. Wangensteen (eds.), Normer og Regler. Festskrift til Dag Gundersen 15. januar 1998. Oslo: Nordisk forening for leksikografi: 158–170
Sandøy, H. (1998b). ‘The diffusion of a new morphology in Norwegian dialects’. In P. Auer (ed.), Dialect Levelling and the Standard Varieties in Europe (= Folia Linguistica 32(12): 83–100)
Sandøy, H. (2000). ‘Utviklingslinjer i moderne norske dialektar’, Folkmålsstudier 39: 345–384
Sandøy, H. (2003a). ‘Språkendring, kontakt og spreiing’. In Mæhlum et al. (eds.), Språkmøte. Innføring i sosiolingvistikk. Oslo: Cappelen Akademisk Forlag, 196–247
Sandøy, H. (2003b). ‘Types of society and language change in the Nordic countries’. In B.-L. Gunnarson et al. (eds.), Language Variation in Europe. Uppsala: Uppsala University, Dept. of Scandinavian Languages, 53–76
Sankoff, D. (1988). ‘Sociolinguistics and syntactic variation’. In F. Newmeyer (ed.), Linguistics: The Cambridge Survey, Ⅳ. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 140–161CrossRef
Sankoff, D. and Labov, W. (1979). ‘On the uses of variable rules’, Language in Society 8: 189–223CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Sankoff, G. (1973). ‘Above and beyond phonology in variable rules’. In C.-J. Bailey and R. W. Shuy (eds.), New Ways of Analysing Variation in English. Washington DC: Center for Applied Linguistics, 44–61
Sankoff, G. (1974). ‘A quantitative paradigm for the study of communicative competence’. In R. Bauman and J. Sherzer (eds.), Explorations in the Ethnography of Speaking. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 18–49
Sankoff, G. and Vincent, D. (1977). ‘L'emploi productif du ne dans le Français parlé à Montréal’, Le Français Moderne 45: 243–256Google Scholar
Sapir, E. (1921). Language. An Introduction to the Study of Speech. San Diego: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich
Saporta, S. (1965). ‘Ordered rules, dialect differences, and historical processes’, Language 41: 218–224CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Sarhimaa, A. (2000). ‘The divisive frontier: the impact of the Russian–Finnish border on Karelian’. In J. Kallen, F. Hinskens, and J. Taeldeman (eds.), Dialect Convergence and Divergence across European borders (International Journal of the Sociology of Language 145: 153–180)
Sasse, H.-J. (1985). ‘Sprachkontakt und Sprachwandel: Die Gräzisierung der albanischen Mundarten Griechenlands’. Papiere zur Linguistik 32: 37–95Google Scholar
Saville-Troike, Muriel (1982). The Ethnography of Communication. An Introduction. Oxford: Blackwell
Scheibman, J. (2002). Point of View and Grammar: Structural Patterns of Subjectivity in American English Conversation. Amsterdam: John Benjamins
Scherre, M. M. P. (2001). ‘Phrase-level parallelism effect on noun phrase number agreement’, Language Variation and Change 13(1): 91–107CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Scheuringer, H. (1990). ‘Bayerisches Bairisch und österreichisches Bairisch. Die deutsch-österreichische Staatsgrenze als “Sprachgrenze”?’ In Kremer and Niebaum (eds.): 361–381
Schilling-Estes, N. (2000). ‘On the nature of insular and post-insular dialects: innovation, variation and differentiation’. Paper presented at Sociolinguistics Symposium 2000, 27–29 April, University of the West of England. [To appear in a Special Issue of the Journal of Sociolinguistics, edited by Lesley Milroy.]
Schilling-Estes, N. and Wolfram, W. (1994). ‘Convergent explanation and alternative regularization patterns: were/weren't levelling in a vernacular English variety’, Language Variation and Change 6: 273–302CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Schirmunski, V. M. (1928). Die deutschen Kolonien in der Ukraine. Geschichte, Mundarten, Volkslied, Volkskunde. Charkow
Schirmunski, V. M. (1930). ‘Sprachgeschichte und Siedelungsmundarten’, Germanisch-Romanische Monatschrift ⅩⅧ, 113–122 (Teil Ⅰ), 171–188 (Teil Ⅱ)
Schirmunski, V. M. (1962). Deutsche Mundartkunde. Vergleichende Laut-und Formenlehre der deutschen Mundarten. Berlin
Schlobinski, P. (1997). The Sociolinguistics of Berlin Urban Vernacular. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter
Schmeller, J. A. (1984). Cimbrisches Wörterbuch, das ist deutsches Idioticon der Ⅶ und ⅩⅢ communi in den venetianischen Alpen. Edited and introduced by J. Bergmann. Vienna: Bracemüller. Re-edited as Über die Sogenannten Cimbern der Ⅶ. und ⅩⅢ. Communen auf den Venedischen Alpen und ihre Sprache. Landshut: Curatorium Cimbricum Bavarense, 1985
Schmidt, J. (1872). Die Verwandtschaftsverhältnisse der indogermanischen Sprachen. Weimar: Böhlau
Schmieger, R. (1998). ‘The situation of the Macedonian language in Greece: sociolinguistic analysis’, International Journal of the Sociology of Language 131: 125–155CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Schuchardt, H. (1870). Über die Klassifikation der romanischen Mundarten. Leipziger Probevorlesung. Graz, 1900
Schuchardt, H. (1885). Über die Lautgesetze, gegen die Junggrammatiker. Berlin: Oppenheim
Schwitalla, J. (2002). ‘Kohäsion statt Kohärenz. Bedeutungsverschiebungen nach dem Sprecherwechsel – vornehmlich in Streitgesprächen’. In A. Deppermann and T. Spranz-Fogasy (eds.), Be-deuten: Wie Bedeutung im Gespräch entsteht. Tübingen: Stauffenburg, 106–118
Sebba, M. (1997). Contact Languages: Pidgins and Creoles. London: Macmillan
Seip, D. A. (1916). Grundlaget for det norske Riksmaal. Kristiania: Olaf Nordlis Forlag
Seip, D. A. (1920). ‘Til Riksmålets Forhistorie’. Maal og Minne 1920: 129–142
Selkirk, E. O. (1982). ‘The syllable’. In H. van der Hulst and N. Smith (eds.), The Structure of Phonological Representations, Vol. 2. Dordrecht: Foris, 337–383
Selkirk, E. O. (1984). Phonology and Syntax: The Relation Between Sound and Structure. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press
Sells, P., Rickford, J. R., and Wasow, T. (1996a). ‘An optimality theoretic approach to variation in negative inversion in AAVE’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory 14: 591–627CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Sells, P., Rickford, J. R., and Wasow, T. (1996b). ‘Variation in negative inversion in AAVE: an optimality theoretic approach’. In J. Arnold, R. Blake, B. Davidson, S. Schwenter, and J. Solomon (eds.), Sociolinguistic Variation: Data, Theory, and Analysis. Stanford: CSLI, 161–176
Selting, M. (1983). ‘Institutionelle Kommunikation: Stilwechsel als Mittel strategischer Interaktion’, Linguistische Berichte 86: 29–48Google Scholar
Seppänen, A. (1999). ‘Dialectal variation in English relativization’, Lingua 109: 15–34CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Shuy, R. (1990). ‘A brief history of American sociolinguistics’, Historiographia Linguistica 17(1/2): 183–209CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Siebenhaar, B. (1999). Sprachvariation, Sprachwandel und Einstellung. Der Dialekt der Stadt Aarau in der Labilitätszone zwischen Zürcher und Berner Mundartraum. Stuttgart: Steiner
Siegel, J. (1985). ‘Koines and koineization’, Language in Society 14(3): 357–378CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Siegel, J. (1987). Language Contact in a Plantation Environment. A Sociolinguistic History of Fiji. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Siegel, J. (1992). ‘Language change and culture change among Fiji Indians’. In T. Dutton (ed.), Culture Change, Language Change. Case Studies from Melanesia (= Pacific Linguistics C120: 91–113)
Siegel, J. (1993). ‘Dialect contact and koineization’. In J. Siegel (ed.), Koines and koineization (= International Journal of the Sociology of Language 99: 105–121)
Siegel, J. (1997). ‘Mixing, leveling, and pidgin/creole development’. In A. K. Spears and D. Winford (eds.), The Structure and Status of Pidgins and Creoles. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins, 111–149CrossRef
Siegel, J. (2001). ‘Koine formation and creole genesis’. In N. Smith and T. Veenstra (eds.), Creolisation and Contact. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: Benjamins, 175–197CrossRef
Sihler, A. L. (2000). Language History: An Introduction. Amsterdam: Benjamins
Silva-Corvalán, C. (1994). Language Contact and Change: Spanish in Los Angeles. Oxford: Clarendon Press
Singh, R. (1981). ‘On some “redundant compoundsin modern Hindi’, Recherches linguistiques à Montreal/Montreal working papers in linguistics: 17, 169–175Google Scholar
Singh, R. (1995). ‘Rethinking the relationship between phonology and loan phonology’, Folia Linguistica 29: 395–405CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Singh, R. and Ford, A. (1989). ‘A closer look at so-called variable rule processes’. In Fasold and Schiffrin (eds.): 367–379
Skautrup, P. (1944–1970). Det danske sprogs historie, Vols. 1–5. Copenhagen: Gyldendal
Smith, Neil (1989). The Twitter Machine: Reflections on Language. Oxford: Blackwell
Smith, Norval (2000). ‘Dependency Theory meets OT: a proposal for a new approach to segmental structure’. In J. Dekkers, F. van der Leeuw, and J. van der Weijer (eds.), Optimality Theory. Phonology, Syntax, and Acquisition. Oxford/New York: Oxford University Press, 234–276
Smith, Norval (1979). ‘The nonacquisition of a phonological rule: a case of Frisian influence?’ In M. Gerritsen (ed.), Taalverandering in Nederlandse dialekten. Honderd jaar dialektvragenlijsten 1879–1979. Muiderberg: Coutinho, 244–249
Smits, C. (1996). Disintegration of Inflection. The Case of Iowa Dutch. The Hague: Holland Academic Graphics
Snyder, W. (2001). ‘On the nature of syntactic variation. Evidence from complex predicates and complex word-formation’, Language 77(2): 324–342CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Sobin, N. (1987). ‘The variable status of COMP-trace phenomena’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory 5: 33–60CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Sobrero, A. A. (1996). ‘Italianization and variations in the repertoire: the Koinai’, Sociolinguistica 10: 105–111CrossRefGoogle Scholar
‘Sprachwandels’. In Kremer and Niebaum (eds.): 7–21
Stilling, N. P. (1987). De nye Byer. Stationsbyernes befolkningsforhold og funktion 1840–1940. Viborg: Selskabetfor Stationsbyforskning
Straczuk, J. (1999). Język a tożsamość człowieka w warunkach społecznej wielojęzyczności [Language and identity in the context of societal multilingualism]. Warsaw: Wydawnictwo Uniwersytetu Warszawskiego
Strassoldo, R. (ed.) (1973). Confini e regioni. Trieste: Edizioni LINT
Strassoldo, R. and Gubert, R. (1973). ‘The boundary. An overview of its current theoretical status’. In Strassoldo (ed.): 29–57
Stråth, B. (ed.) (1990). Language and the Construction of Class Identities. Gothenburg: Gothenburg University
Ström, A. and Schirmunski, V. M. (1926/1927). ‘Deutsche Mundarten an der Newa’. In Teuthonista 3(1–2): 39–62Google Scholar
Stroop, J. (1998). Poldernederlands. Waardoor het ABN verdwijnt. Amsterdam: Bert Bakker
Stuart-Smith, J. (1999). ‘Glasgow: accent and voice quality’. In P. Foulkes and G. J. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 203–222
Stuart-Smith, J. (2001). ‘Should variationists worry about the influence of TV on speech?’ Plenary lecture given at the 3rd UK Language Variation Conference, Department of Language and Linguistic Science, University of York, 19–22 July
Stubbe, M. and Holmes, J. (1995). ‘“You know”, “eh” and other “exasperating expressions”: An analysis of social and stylistic variation in the use of pragmatic devices in a sample of New Zealand English’, Language and Communication 15: 63–88CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Sudbury, A. (2000). ‘Dialect contact and koinéisation in the Falkland Islands: development of a southern hemisphere English?’ Ph.D. thesis, University of Essex
Sudbury, A. (2001). ‘Falkland Islands English: a southern hemisphere variety?’, English World Wide 22: 55–80CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Sundgren, E. (2000). ‘A Swedish case study of language change in real time: the impact of integration in the local community on linguistic behaviour’. Paper presented at the Ist International Conference on Language Variation in Europe (ICLaVE 1), Barcelona, 29 June–1 July
Suñer, M. and Lizardi, C. (1995). ‘Dialectal variation in an argumental/non-argumental asymmetry in Spanish’, in J. Amastae, G. Goodall, M. Montalbetti, and M. Phinney (eds.), Contemporary Research in Romance Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 187–203CrossRef
Svensson, L. (1981). Ett fall av språkvård under 1600-talet. Lundastudier i nordisk språkvetenskap. Lund: Walter Ekstrand
Swigart, L. (1992). ‘Two codes or one? The insiders’ view and the description of codeswitching in Dakar’. In C. M. Eastman (ed.), Codeswitching, Multilingual Matters, Clevedon: 83–102CrossRef
Syv, P. (1919) (1685). ‘Den danske Sprog-Kunst’. In Henrik Bertelsen (ed.), Danske Grammatikere, Vol. 3. Copenhagen: Gyldendal: 147–250
Taeldeman, J. (1978). De vokaalstruktuur van de Oostvlaamse dialecten. Amsterdam: K.N.A.W
Taeldeman, J. (1984). ‘Joas Lambrechts “Nederlandsche Spellijnghe” (1550) als spiegel van het (Laat-) Middelgentse vokaalsysteem’. In W. J. J. Pijnenburg, K. Roelandts, and V. F. Vanacker (eds.), Feestbundel Maurits Gysseling. Leuven: 325–334
Taeldeman, J. (1985). De klankstruktuur van het Gentse dialect. Ghent: Recueil Faculteit Letteren en Wijsbegeerte
Taeldeman, J. (1993). ‘Dialectresistentie en dialectverlies op fonologisch gebied’. In F. Hinskens, C. Hoppenbrouwers, and J. Taeldeman (eds.), Dialectverlies en regiolectvorming (Taal en tongval 46, 102–119)
Taeldeman, J. (1998). ‘Levelling phenomena in the Flemish dialects: some observations on their teleology’. In P. Auer (ed.), Dialect Levelling and the Standard Varieties in Europe, Folia Linguistica 32, 11–22CrossRef
Taeldeman, J. (1999). ‘Het Gents. Een eiland in het Oost-Vlaamse dialectgebied’. In J. Kruijsen and N. van der Sijs (eds.), Honderd jaar stadstaal. Amsterdam/Antwerp: Uitg. Contact, 273–287
Taeldeman, J. (2000). ‘Polarisering’, Taal en tongval 52, 227–244Google Scholar
Tagliamonte, S. (1997). ‘Obsolescence in the English perfect? Evidence from Samaná English’, American Speech 72(1): 33–68CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Taeldeman, J. (1998). ‘Was/were variation across the generations: view from the city of York’, Language Variation and Change, 10(2): 153–191Google Scholar
Tagliamonte, S. and Hudson, R. (1999). ‘Be like et al. beyond America: The quotative system in British and Canadian youth’, Journal of Sociolinguistics 3(2): 147–172CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Tagliamonte, S. and Poplack, S. (1988). ‘How Black English PAST got to the present: evidence from Samaná’, Language in Society 17(4): 513–533CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Tagliamonte, S. and Smith, J. (1999). ‘Analogical levelling in Samaná English’, Journal of English Linguistics 27(1): 8–26CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Teleman, U. (2002). Ära, rikedom & reda. Svensk språkvård och språkpolitik under äldre nyare tid. Stockholm: Norstedts ordbok
Tenny, C. L. (1987). Grammaticalizing Aspect and Affectedness. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Thakerar, J. N., Giles, H., and Cheshire, J. (1982). ‘Psychological and linguistic parameters of speech accommodation theory’. In C. Fraser and K. R. Scherer (eds.), Advances in the Social Psychology of Language. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 205–255
Thelander, M. (1980). ‘De-dialectalisation in Sweden’. FUMS Rapport No. 86. Uppsala: Uppsala University
Thelander, M. (1982). ‘A qualitative approach to the quantitative data of speech variation’. In S. Romaine (ed.), Sociolinguistic Variation in Speech Communities. London: Edward Arnold, 65–83
Thomas, A. R. (1972). ‘A note on dialect borrowing’, Studia Celtica 7: 163–167Google Scholar
Thomason, S. G. and Kaufmann, T. (1988). Language Contact, Creolization, and Genetic Linguistics. Berkeley: University of California Press
Thorsen, P. K. (1929) (1906). ‘Hvor gammelt er det nye i det danske sprog?’ In Afhandlinger og Breve, Vol. 2. Copenhagen: Schønbergske 84–86
Thurneysen, R. (1946). A Grammar of Old Irish. Dublin: Dublin Institute for Advanced Studies
Tibiletti Bruno, M. G. (1974). ‘Integrazione linguistica degli anziani in un paese del Varesotto’. In Dal dialetto alla lingua. Pisa: Pacini, 195–227
Tode, J. C. (1797). Neue Dänische Grammatik für Deutsche. Copenhagen
Tokc’, S. (2000). ‘Etničnyja pracesy na terytoryi belaruska-pol'skaha pamežža Û ⅩⅨ – na pačatku ⅩⅩ stahoddzja [Ethnic processes on the territory of the Belarusian-Polish border region in the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries]. In E. Smułkowa and A. Engelking (eds.), Język a tożsamość na pograniczu kultur [Language and identity in cultural borderlands]. Białystok: Katedra Kultury Białoruskiej Uniwersytetu w Białymstoku, 101–114
Tollfree, L. (1999). ‘South East London English: discrete versus continuous modelling of consonantal reduction’. In P. Foulkes and G. J. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 163–184
Tollfree, L. (2001). ‘Variation and change in Australian consonants: reduction of /t/’. In D. Blair and P. Collins (eds.), English in Australia. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 45–67CrossRef
Tönnies, F. (1887). Gemeinschaft und Gesellschaft. Leipzig: Fues
Torgersen, E. N., and Kerswill, P. E. (2004). ‘Internal and external motivation in phonetic change: dialect levelling outcomes for an English vowel shift’, Journal of Sociolinguistics 8(1): 24–53CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Toribio, A. J. (1993). ‘Parametric Variation in the Licensing of Nominals’. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, Cornell University, Ithaca, NY
Toribio, A. J. (1996). ‘Dialectal variation and the licensing of null referential and expletive pronouns’, in Parodi et al. (eds.): 409–432
Toribio, A. J. (2000). ‘Intralingual variation’. Paper presented at Sociolinguistics Symposium 2000, 27–29 April, University of the West of England, Bristol
Torp, A. (2001). ‘Retroflex consonants and dorsal /r/: mutually excluding innovations? On the diffusion of dorsal /r/ in Scandinavian’. In H. Van de Velde and R. van Hout (eds.), R-atics. Etudes et Travaux (Bruxelles), No. 4: 75–90
Tottie, G. and Rey, M. (1997). ‘Relativization strategies in Earlier African American Vernacular English’, Language Variation and Change 9: 219–247CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Trask, R. L. (1996). Historical Linguistics. London: Arnold
Trautmann, M. (1880). ‘Besprechung einiger schulbücher nebst bemerkungen über die rlaute’, Anglia 3, 201–222Google Scholar
Trosterud, T. (1989). ‘The null subject parameter and the new mainland Scandinavian word order: a possible counter example from a Norwegian dialect’. In J. Niemi (ed.), Papers from the 11th Scandinavian Conference of Linguistics 1: 87–100
Trudgill, P. J. (1972). ‘Sex, covert prestige and linguistic change in the urban British English of Norwich’, Language in Society 1: 179–195CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Trudgill, P. J. (1974a). The Social Differentiation of English in Norwich. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Trudgill, P. J. (1974b). ‘Linguistic change and diffusion: description and explanation in sociolinguistic geography’, Language in Society 3: 215–246CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Trudgill, P. J. (1978). ‘Introduction: sociolinguistics and sociolinguistics’. In P. Trudgill (ed.), Sociolinguistic Patterns in British English. London: Edward Arnold, 1–18
Trudgill, P. J. (1983a). ‘Linguistic change and diffusion. Description and explanation in geolinguistics’. In P. Trudgill (ed.), On Dialect. Oxford: Blackwell, 52–87
Trudgill, P. J. (1983b). On Dialect. Oxford: Blackwell
Trudgill, P. J. (1986). Dialects in Contact. Oxford: Blackwell
Trudgill, P. J. (1988). ‘On the role of dialect contact and interdialect in linguistic change’. In J. Fisiak (ed.), Historical Dialectology. Regional and Social. Berlin/New York/Amsterdam: Mouton de Gruyter, 547–563CrossRef
Trudgill, P. J. (1990). The Dialects of England. Oxford: Blackwell
Trudgill, P. J. (1992). ‘Dialect contact, dialectology and sociolinguistics’. In K. Bolton and H. Kwok (eds.), Sociolinguistics Today. International Perspectives. London/New York: Routledge, 71–79
Trudgill, P. J. (1994). ‘Language contact and dialect contact in linguistic change’. In K. Ulla-Britt and J. Helgander (eds.), Dialektkontakt, Språkkontakt och Språkföråndring i Norden. Föredrag Från ett Forskarsymposium. Stockholm: Institutionen För Nordiska Språk, Stockholms Universitet, 13–22
Trudgill, P. J. (1996). ‘Dialect typology: isolation, social network and phonological structure’. In G. R. Guy et al., Towards a Social Science of Language, Vol. 1. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins, 3–22CrossRef
Trudgill, P. J. (1998). ‘The chaos before the order: New Zealand English and the second stage of new-dialect formation’. In E. H. Jahr (ed.), Advances in Historical Sociolinguistics. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 1–11
Trudgill, P. J. (1999). ‘Norwich: endogenous and exogenous linguistic change’. In P. Foulkes and G. J. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 124–140
Trudgill, P. J. (2000). ‘Sociolinguistics and sociolinguistics once again’. Sociolinguistica 14: 55–59CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Trudgill, P. J. (2002a). ‘The sociolinguistics of modern RP’. In P. Trudgill, Sociolinguistic Variation and Change. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 171–180
Trudgill, P. J. (2002b). ‘Linguistic and social typology’. In J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill, and N. Schilling-Estes (eds.), The Handbook of Language Variation and Change. Oxford: Blackwell. 707–728
Trudgill, P. J. (2004). New-Dialect Formation: The Inevitability of Colonial Englishes. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press
Trudgill, P. J. and Chambers J. K. (eds.) (1991). Dialects of English: Studies in Grammatical Variation. London: Longman
Trudgill, P. J., Gordon, E., Lewis, G., and Maclagan, M. (2000). ‘Determinism in new-dialect formation and the genesis of New Zealand English’, Journal of Linguistics 36: 299–318CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Turner, B. (1996). The Blackwell Companion to Social Theory. Oxford: Blackwell
Valian, V. (1991). ‘Syntactic subjects in the early speech of American and Italian children’, Cognition 40: 21–81CrossRefGoogle ScholarPubMed
Vammen, H. (1990). ‘Bourgeois mentality in Denmark 1730–1900’. In B. Stråth (ed.), Language and the Construction of Class Identities. Gothenburg: Gothenburg University, 283–310
Van Bree, C. (1990). Historische Taalkunde. Leuven/Amsterdam: Acco
Van Bree, C. (1994). ‘The development of so-called Town Frisian’. In P. Bakker and M. Mous (eds.), Mixed Languages. 15 Case studies in language intertwining. Amsterdam: IFOTT, 69–82
Van Bree, C. (1997). Een oud onderwerp opnieuw bekeken: het Ingweoons. Farewell address, Leiden University: Leiden University Press
Van Coetsem, F. (1988). Loan Phonology and the Two Transfer Types in Language Contact. Dordrecht/Providence: Foris
Van Coetsem, F. (2000). A General and Unified Theory of the Transmission Process in Language Contact. Heidelberg: Winter
Van de Velde, H. (1996). ‘Variatie en verandering in het gesproken Standaard-Nederlands (1935–1993)’. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, University of Nijmegen
Van der Horst, J. and Marschall, F. (1992). Korte geschiedenis van de Nederlandse taal. Amsterdam: Nijgh & Van Ditmar
Van Kemenade, A. (1987). ‘Syntactic Case and Morphological Case in the History of English’. Unpublished Ph.D. diss., Rijksuniversiteit, UtrechtCrossRef
Van Kemenade, A. (1993). ‘Parametric change and the history of English impersonals’. Paper presented at the LAGB, 14 September, Bangor, UCNW
Van Kemenade, A. (1994). ‘Old and Middle English’. In E. König and J. van der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London/New York: 110–141
Van Kemenade, A. and Vincent, N. (eds.) (1997). Parameters of Morphosyntactic Change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Van Marle, J. (1997). ‘Dialect versus standard language: nature versus culture’. In J. Cheshire and D. Stein (eds.), Taming the Vernacular. From Dialect to Written Standard Language. London/New York: Longman, 13–34
Van Ness, S. (1994). ‘Pennsylvania German’. In E. König and J. van der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London/New York: 420–438
Van Oostendorp, M. (1997). ‘Style levels in conflict resolution’. In F. Hinskens, R. van Hout, and L. Wetzels (eds.), Variation, Change and Phonological Theory. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: Benjamins, 207–229CrossRef
Van Riemsdijk, H. C. (1978). A Case Study in Syntactic Markedness. Dordrecht: Foris
Vandekerckhove, R. (1998). ‘Code-switching between dialect and standard language as a graduator of dialect loss and dialect vitality. A case study in West Flanders’. Zeitschrift für Dialektologie und Linguistik 65: 280–292Google Scholar
Verstegen, V. (1942). ‘De Westgermaanse sk in de Zuidnederlandse dialecten’. In Handelingen Koninklijke Commissie voor Toponymie en Dialectologie 16: 31–42 + 2 mapsGoogle Scholar
Vikør, L. S. (1993). The Nordic Languages. Oslo: Novus
Vikør, L. S. (1994). Språkplanlegging. Prinsipp og praksis. Oslo: Novus
Vikør, L. S. (2001). The Nordic languages. Their Status and Interrelations. Oslo: Novus
Vikør, L. S. (2002). ‘The Nordic language area and the languages in the north of Europe’. In The Nordic Languages. An International Handbook of the History of the North Germanic Languages, Vol. 1. Berlin/New York: de Gruyter: 1–12
Villena, J. A. (1994). La ciudad lingüística. Fundamentos críticos de la sociolingüística urbana. Granada: Universidad
Villena, J. A. (1996). ‘Convergence and divergence in a standard dialect continuum: networks and individuals in Malaga’. In Auer and Hinskens (eds.) (1996): 112–137
Villena, J. A. (2001). La continuidad del cambio lingüístico. Tendencias conservadoras e innovadoras en la fonología del español. Granada: Universidad
Villena, J. A. and Requena, F. (1996). ‘Género, educación y uso lingüístico: la variación social y reticular de s y z en la ciudad de Málaga’. Lingüística 8: 548Google Scholar
Vinje, F. E. (1984). ‘“Damer sier kjød”. Dannet dagligtale dengang og nå’. In B. Fossestøl et al. (eds.), Festskrift til Einar Lundeby, 3 Oktober 1984. Oslo: Novus, 211–236
Vinje, F. E. (1987). Rent ut sagt – En veiledning i østnorsk standardtalespråk. Oslo: Novus
Vinje, F. E. (1998). ‘Talemålsnormering i NRK’. In Vatvedt Fjeld and B. Wangensteen (eds.), Normer og Regler. Festskrift til Dag Gundersen 15. januar 1998. Oslo: Nordisk forening for leksikografi, 143–157
von Unwerth, W. (1918). Proben deutschrussischer Mundarten aus den Wolgakolonien und dem Gouvernement Cherson. (Abhandlungen der Preußischen Akademie der Wissenschaften. Philologisch-historische Klasse. 11). Berlin
Voortman, B. (1994). Regionale variatie in het taalgebruik van notabelen. Een sociolinguïstisch onderzoek in Middelburg, Roermond en Zutphen. Ph.D. thesis University of Amsterdam: IFOTT
Wang, W. S.-Y. (ed.) (1977). The Lexicon in Phonological Change. The Hague: Mouton
Wängler, H. H. (1963). Rangwoerterbuch hochdeutscher Umgangssprache. Marburg
Wassermann, S. and Galaskiewicz, J. (eds.) (1994). Advances in Social Network Analysis. Research in the Social and Behavioural Sciences. London & Thousand Oaks: Sage
Wassermann, S. and Faust, K. (1994). Social Network Analysis: Methods and Applications. New York: Cambridge University Press
Watt, D. and Milroy, L. (1999). ‘Patterns of variation and change in three Newcastle vowels: is this dialect levelling?’ In P. Foulkes and G. J. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 25–46
Watts, R. J. (2000). ‘Mythical strands in the ideology of prescriptivism’. In L. Wright (ed.), The Development of Standard English 1300–1800. Theories, Descriptions, Conflicts. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 29–48CrossRef
Weijnen, A. (1977). The Value of the Map Configuration. Special issue of Mededelingen van de Nijmeegse Centrale voor Dialect-en Naamkunde
Weiner, E. J. and Labov, W. (1983). ‘Constraints on the agentless passive’, Journal of Linguistics 19: 29–58CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Weinreich, U. (1953). Languages in Contact. The Hague: Mouton
Weinreich, U. (1954). ‘Is a structural dialectology possible?’, Word 10(2/3): 388–400CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Weinreich, U., Labov, W., and Herzog, M. (1968). ‘Empirical foundations for a theory of language change’. In W. Lehmann and Y. Malkiel (eds.), Directions for Historical Linguistics; a Symposium. Austin: University of Texas Press, 95–188
Weinrich, H. (1985). Textgrammatik der französischen Sprache, 1. Aufl. 1982. Stuttgart: Nachdruck
Weissenborn, J., Goodluck, H., and Roeper, T. (eds.) (1992). Theoretical Issues in Language Acquisition. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum
Wellman, B. (1998). ‘Structural analysis: from metaphor to substance’. In B. Wellman and S. D. Berkowitz (eds.), Social Structures: A Network Approach. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Wells, J. C. (1982). Accents of English, 3 vols. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Wessén, I. (1937). ‘Vårt riksspråk. Några huvudpunkter av dess historiska utveckling’. In Modermålslärarnas förenings årsskrift
White, L. (1989). Universal Grammar and Second Language Acquisition. Amsterdam: John Benjamins
Widmark, G. (1991). ‘Boksvenska och talsvenska. Om språkarter i nysvenskt talspråk’, Språk och Stil Ny följdl: 157–197
Wiese, R. (2001). ‘The unity and variation of (German) /r/’. In H. Van de Velde and R. van Hout (eds.), R-atics. Etudes et Travaux (Brussels), No. 4: 11–26
Wiesinger, P. (1983). ‘Deutsche Dialektgebiete außerhalb des deutschen Sprachgebiets: Mittel-, Südost-und Osteuropa’. In W. Besch, U. Knoop, W. Putschke, and H. E. Wiegand (eds.), Dialektologie. Ein Handbuch zur deutschen und allgemeinen Dialektforschung. Halbbd. 2. Berlin/New York: 900–929CrossRef
Williams, A. and Kerswill, P. (1999). ‘Dialect levelling: change and continuity in Milton Keynes, Reading and Hull’. In P. Foulkes and G. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 141–162
Williams, G. (1992). Sociolinguistics. A Sociological Critique. London/New York: Routledge
Wilson, J. and Henry, A. (1998). ‘Parameter setting within a socially realistic linguistics’, Language in Society 27: 1–21CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Wilson, T. M. and Donnan, H. (eds.) (1998). Border Identities: Nation and State at International Frontiers. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Winford, D. (1984). ‘The linguistic variable and syntactic variation in creole continua’, Lingua 62, 267–288CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Winford, D. (1993). ‘Variation in the use of perfect have in Trinidadian English: a problem of categorial and semantic mismatch’, Language Variation and Change 5: 141–187CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Winford, D. (1996). ‘The problem of syntactic variation’. In J. Arnold, R. Blake, B. Davidson, S. Schwenter, and J. Solomon (eds.), Sociolinguistic Variation: Data, Theory, and Analysis. Stanford: CSLI Publications, 177–192
Winge, V. (1992). Dänische Deutsche – deutsche Dänen. Geschichte der deutschen Sprache in Dänemark 1300–1800 mit einem Ausblick auf das 19. Jahrhundert. Heidelberg: Carl Winter Universitätsverlag
Wolfram, W. (1969). A Sociolinguistic Description of Detroit Negro Speech. Washington, DC: Center for Applied Linguistics
Wolfram, W. (1975). ‘Variable constraints and rule relations’, in R. Fasold and R. Shuy (eds.), Analysing Variation in Language. Washington DC: Center for Applied Linguistics, 70–88
Wolfram, W. (1991). ‘The linguistic variable: fact and fantasy’, American Speech 66(1): 22–32CrossRef
Wolfram, W. (1993). ‘Identifying and interpreting variables’. In D. R. Preston (ed.), American Dialect Research. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 193–222CrossRef
Wolfram, W. and Hazen, K. (1996). ‘Isolation within isolation: the invisible Outer Banks dialect’. In M. Meyerhoff (ed.), (N) WAVES and MEANS: A Selection of Papers from NWAVE 24 = University of Pennsylvania Working Papers in Linguistics 3(1): 141–157
Wolgadeutscher Sprachatlas (WDSA) (1996). Aufgrund der von Georg Dinges 1925–1929 gesammelten Materialien. Bearb. und hrsg. von Nina Berend. Unter Mitarb. von Rudolf Post. Tübingen/Basle
Wollersheim, H.-W. (1998). ‘Identifikation’. In H.-W. Wollersheim, S. Tzschaschel, and M. Middell (eds.), Region und Identifikation. Leipzig: Leipziger Universitätsverlag, 47–55
Woods, H. B. (1991). ‘Social differentiation in Ottawa English’. In J. Cheshire (ed.), English Around the World: Sociolinguistic Perspectives. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 134–149CrossRef
Woods, N. J. (2000). ‘Archaism and innovation in New Zealand English’, English World Wide 21: 109–150CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Worm, P. (1873). ‘Skriftsproget og Folkemaalene’. Nordisk Maanedsskrift. Odense: Den Miloske Boghandel, 81–115
Wrede, F. (1919). ‘Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der deutschen Mundartforschung’, Zeitschrift für deutsche Mundarten: 3–18
Zagona, K. (1994). ‘Compositionality of aspect: evidence from Spanish aspectual se’. Communication LSRL 24. Los AngelesGoogle Scholar
Zeller, C. (1993). ‘Linguistic symmetries, asymmetries and border effects within a Canadian/American sample’. In Clarke, Sandra (ed.), Focus on Canada. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins, 179–199CrossRef
Zipf, G. (1946). ‘The P1P2/D hypothesis: on the intercity movement of persons’, American Sociological Review 11(6): 677–686CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Abraham, W. (1999). ‘Preterite decay as a European phenomenon’, Folia Linguistica 33 (1): 11–18CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Abraham, W. and Bayer, J. (eds.) (1993). Dialectsyntax. Opladen: Westdeutscher verlag
Abrahamson, W. H. F. (1812). Versuch einer vollständigen dänischen Sprachlehre für Deutsche
Ackema, P. and Schoorlemmer, M. (1994). ‘The middle constructions and the syntax-semantics interface’, Lingua 93: 59–90CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Ackema, P. and Schoorlemmer, M. (1995). ‘Middles and nonmovement’, Linguistic Inquiry 2: 173–197Google Scholar
Adams, M. (1987). ‘From Old French to the theory of pro drop’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory 5: 1–32CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Agard, F. (1971). ‘Language and dialect: some tentative postulates’, Linguistics 65, 5–24CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Aitchison, J. (1981). Language Change: Progress or Decay? London: Fontana
Aitchison, J. (1991). 2nd edn. Language Change: Progress or Decay? Douglas, Isle of Man: Fontana
Akselberg, G. (2003). ‘Talevariasjon i Noreg’. In Mæhlum et al. (eds.), Språkmøte. Innføring i sosiolingvistikk. Oslo: Cappelen Akademisk Forlag, 144–165
Alarcos Llorach, E. (1950, 4th edn. 1968). Fonología española. Madrid: Gredos
Alfonzetti, G. (1992). Il discorso bilingue. Italiano e dialetto a Catania. Milan: Angeli
Alarcos Llorach, E. (1996). ‘“Neutralità” sociolinguistica e “neutralità” strutturale nel discorso italiano-dialetto’. In S. C. Sgroi and S. C. Trovato (eds.), Letterature e lingue nazionali e regionali. Rome: Il Calamo, 65–87
Almagro, A. M. (1993). ‘Semantic information in se-constructions in Spanish’. Working Papers in Linguistics: Grammar and the Lexicon 16: 136–154, University of TrondheimGoogle Scholar
Altenhofen, C. V. (1996). Hunsrückisch in Rio Grande do Sul. Ein Beitrag zur Beschreibung einer deutschbrasilianischen Dialektvarietät im Kontakt mit dem Portugiesischen. (= Mainzer Studien zur Sprach-und Volksforschung. 21). Stuttgart
Amara, M. H. (1999). Politics and Sociolinguistic Reflexes: Palestinian Border Villages. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins
Andersen, G. (2001). Pragmatic Markers and Sociolinguistic Variation: A Relevance-theoretic Approach to the Language of Adolescents. Amsterdam: John Benjamins
Andersen, H. (1973). ‘Abductive and deductive change’, Language 49 (4): 765–793CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Andersen, H. (1988). ‘Center and periphery: adoption, diffusion and spread’. In J. Fisiak (ed.), Historical Dialectology. Regional and Social. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 39–83CrossRef
Andersen, H. (1989). ‘Understanding linguistic innovations’. In L. Breivik and E. Jahr (eds.), Language Change. Contributions to the Study of its Causes. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 5–27CrossRef
Angelov, A. (2000). ‘A Balkan political border as a factor for language divergence’, paper presented at the first international conference on Language Variation in Europe (ICLaVE 1), Barcelona, 29 June–1 July
Appel, C. (2001). Læsning og Bogmarked i 1600-tallets Danmark. Copenhagen: Det Kongelige bibliotek/Museum Tusculanum
Appel, R. (1999). ‘“Ik mix gewoon, no span”. De straattaal van jongeren in Amsterdam’, Onze Taal 68 (1): 140–143Google Scholar
Arašonkava, A. and Mackevič, J. (1968). ‘Ab belaruskix dyjalektnyx rysax zaxodnjaha pahraničča [‘On the Belarusian dialect features of the western border region’]. Slavia Orientalis 17 (3): 273–280
Archangeli, D. and Langendoen, D. T. (1997). Optimality Theory: An Overview. Oxford: Blackwell
Arends, J. (ed.) (1995). The Early Stages of Creolization. Amsterdam: Benjamins
Arends, J., Muysken, P., and Smith, N. (eds.) (1995). Pidgins and Creoles. An Introduction. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: Benjamins
Armstrong, N. (1997). Social and Stylistic Variation in Spoken French. Amsterdam: John Benjamins
Arnold, J., Blake, R., Davidson, B., Schwenter, S., and Solomon, J. (eds.) (1996). Sociolinguistic Variation: Data, Theory and Analysis. Stanford: CSLI
Asfandiarova, D. (1999): ‘>Mir verzehle doch Lutherisch und die Katholisch< – Dialektmischung im Vokalismus in der deutschen Sprachinsel Prišib/Aleksejevka (Baschkortostan, Russische Föderation)’. In G. Brandt (ed.), Historische Soziolinguistik des Deutschen Ⅳ: Soziofunktionale Gruppe – Kommunikative Anforderungen – Sprachgebrauch. Internationale Fachtagung, Rostock, 13.-16.09.1998. (= Stuttgarter Arbeiten zur Germanistik. 372). Stuttgart, 241–262
Aubin, H., Frings, T., and Müller, J. (1926). Kulturströmungen und Kultur provinzen in den Rheinlanden. Geschichte, Sprache, Volkshunde. Bonn (Röhrsheid)
Auburger, L. and Kloss, H. (eds.) (1979). Deutsche Sprachkontakte in Übersee. Nebst einem Beitrag zur Theorie der Sprachkontaktforschung. Tübingen
Auer, P. (1988). ‘MHG î and û in the city dialect of Constance’. In Auer and di Luzio, Variation and Convergence Studies in Social Dialectology. Berlin: de Gruyter, 44–75
Auer, P. (1993). Zweidimensionale Modelle für die Analyse von Standard/Dialekt-Variation und ihre Vorläufer in der deutschen Dialektologie. In W. Viereck (ed.), Historische Dialektologie und Sprachwandel. Verhandlungen des internationalen Dialektologen-Kongresses Bamberg 1990: 3–22
Auer, P. (1997). ‘Co-occurrence restrictions between linguistic variables. A case for social dialectology, phonological theory and variation studies’. In F. Hinskens, R. Van Hout, and W. L. Wetzels (eds.), Variation, Change and Phonological Theory, Amsterdam/Philadelphia: Benjamins, 69–100CrossRef
Auer, P. (1998a). ‘Dialect levelling and the standard varieties in Europe’. In P. Auer (ed.), Dialect Levelling and the Standard Varieties in Europe. Folia Linguistica 32, 1/2, 1–9
Auer, P. (1998b). ‘Führt Dialektaubbau zur Stärkung oder Schwächung der Standardvarietät? Zwei Fallstudien’. In K. Mattheier and E. Radtke (eds.), Standardisierung und Destandardisierung europäischer Nationalsprachen. Frankfurt am Main, etc.: Lang, 129–162
Auer, P. (1999a). ‘Das versteckte Prestige des Türkischen. Zur Verwendung des Türkischen in gemischtetnischen Jugendlichen Gruppen in Hamburg’. In I. Gogolin and B. Nauck (eds.), Migration, gesellschaftliche Differenzierung und Bildung: Resultate des Forschungsschwerpunktprogramms FABER. Opladen: Leske and Budrich, 97–112
Auer, P. (1999b). ‘From code-switching via language mixing to fused lects: towards a dynamic typology of bilingual speech’, International Journal of Bilingualism 3 (4): 309–332CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Auer, P. (in press). ‘Phonological Change’. In U. Ammon et al. (eds.), Handbook of Sociolinguistics/Handbuch der Soziolinguistik, 2nd edn. Berlin: de Gruyter
Auer, P. (in press). ‘Europe's sociolinguistic unity; or, a typology of European dialect/standard constellations’. In N. Delbecque et al. (eds.), Perspectives on Variation. Berlin, etc.: Mouton de Gruyter
Auer, P. and Hinskens, F. (1996). ‘The convergence and divergence of dialects in Europe. New and not so new developments in an old area,’ Sociolinguistica 10: 1–30CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Auer, P., Barden, B., and Großkopf, B. (1997). ‘Long-term linguistic accommodation and its sociolinguistic interpretation: evidence from the inner German migration after the Wende’. In Dialect Migration in a Changing Europe. Frankfurt: Peter Lang
Auer, P.Barden, B., and Grosskopf, B. (1998). ‘Subjective and objective parameters determining “salience” in long-term dialect accommodation’, Journal of Sociolinguistics 2: 163–187CrossRefGoogle Scholar
AvanesaÛ, R. I., Atraxovič, K. K., and Mackevič, J. F. (1963). Dyjalektalahičny atlas belaruskaj movy [Dialectological atlas of the Belarusian language]. Minsk: Vydavectva Akadèmii navuk BSSR
AvanesaÛ, R. I. et al. (1968). Linhvistyčnaja heahrafija i hrupoÛka belaruskix havorak [Linguistic geography and the classification of Belarusian dialects]. Minsk: Navuka i tèxnika
Avila, A. M. (1994). ‘Variación reticular e individual de s/z en el Vernáculo Urbano Malagueño: Datos del barrio de Capuchinos’. Analecta Malacitana 17 (1994): 343–367Google Scholar
Bach, A. (1934, 1950). Deutsche Mundartforschung. Heidelberg: Carl Winter Verlag
Baden, J. (1785). Forelæsninger over det Danske Sprog eller Resonneret Dansk Grammatik. Copenhagen: P. Horrebow
Bailey, C.-J. (1973). Variation and Linguistic Theory. Arlington, Va: Center for Applied Linguistics
Bailey, G., Wikle, T., and Tillery, J. (1993). ‘Some patterns of linguistic diffusion’. Language Variation and Change 5: 359–390CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Bally, C. (1968). Linguistique générale et linguistique française, 4th edn. Berne: Francke
Bakker, P. and Maarten, M. (eds.) (1994). Mixed Languages. 15 Case Studies in Language Intertwining. Amsterdam: IFOTT
Bakker, P. and Marcel, C. (eds.) (1991). In the Margin of Romani. Amsterdam (Publikaties van het Instituut voor Algemene Taalwetenschap, Universiteit van Amsterdam, 58)
Bard, E., Robertson, D., and Sorace, A. (1996). ‘Magnitude estimation of linguistic acceptability’, Language 72: 1–31CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Barden, B. and Großkopf, B. (1998). Sprachliche Akkommodation und soziale Integration: sächsische Übersiedler und Übersiedlerinnen im rhein-/moselfränkischen und alemannischen Sprachraum. Tübingen: Niemeyer
Barnes, J. A. (1954). ‘Class and committees in a Norwegian island parish’, Human Relations 7 (1954): 39–58CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Barry, M. V. (1981). ‘The southern boundaries of Northern Hiberno-English speech’. In Michael V. Barry (ed.), Aspects of English Dialects in Ireland: 1, 52–95. Belfast: The Institute of Irish Studies, The Queen's University of Belfast
Bauer, L. (1988). ‘What is lenition?’, Journal of Linguistics 24: 381–392CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Bayard, D. (1990). ‘Minder, Mork and Mindy? (-t) glottalisation and post-vocalic (-r) in younger New Zealand English speakers’. In A. Bell and J. Holmes (eds.), New Zealand Ways of Speaking English. Clevedon: Multilingual Matters, 149–164
Bayley, R., and Pease-Alvarez, L. (1996). ‘Null and expressed pronoun variation in Mexican-descent Children's Spanish’, in Arnold et al. (eds.): 85–99
Beal, J. (1993). ‘The grammar of Tyneside and Northumbrian English’. In Milroy and Milroy (eds.): 187–213
Beals, K., Denton, J., Knippen, R., Melnar, L., Suzuki, H., and Zeinfeld, E. (eds.) (1994). Papers from the 30th Regional Meeting of the Chicago Linguistic Society, Vol. 2: The Parasession on Variation in Linguistic Theory. Chicago: Chicago Linguistics Society
Beckman, M. E., Jong, K., Jun, S.-A., and Lee, S.-H. (1992). ‘The interaction of coarticulation and prosody in sound change’. Language and Speech 35(1/2): 45–58CrossRefGoogle ScholarPubMed
Beebe, L. (1981), ‘Social and situational factors affecting communicative strategy of dialect code-switching’, International Journal of the Sociology of Language 32: 139–149Google Scholar
Bell, A. (1984). ‘Language style as audience design’, Language in Society 13(2): 145–204CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Bell, A. (2001). ‘Back in style: reworking audience design’. In P. Eckert and John R. Rickford (eds.), Style and Sociolinguistic Variation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 139–169
Belletti, A. (ed.) (1993). Syntactic Theory and the Dialects of Italy. Turin: Rosenberg & Sellier
Belletti, A. and Shlonsky, U. (1995). ‘The order of verbal complements: a comparative study’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory 13: 489–526CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Bellmann, G. (1998). ‘Between base dialect and standard language’. In P. Auer (ed.), ‘Dialect levelling and the standard varieties in Europe’, Folia Linguistica, 32: 1–2, 23–34CrossRef
Benincà, P. (1996). ‘Agglutination and inflection in northern Italian dialects’. In Parodi et al. (eds.), 59–72
Benincà, P. (ed.) (1989). Dialect Variation and the Theory of Grammar. Dordrecht: Foris
Benincà, P. (1994). La Variazione Sintattica. Bologna: Il Mulino
Benincà, P. (1988). Piccola storia ragionata della dialettologia Italiana. Padua: Unipress
Bennike, V. (n.d.). Three handwritten specimens of the author's own language (Institut for Dansk Dialektsamlings manuskriptsamling)
Bentahila, A. and Davies, Eirlys E. (1998). ‘Codeswitching: an unequal partnership’. In R. Jacobson (ed.), Codeswitching Worldwide. Berlin and New York: de Gruyter, 25–49CrossRef
Berend, N. and Jedig, H. (1991). Deutsche Mundarten in der Sowjetunion. Geschichte der Forschung und Bibliographie. Marburg: Elwert
Bernard, J. R. L. (1969). ‘On the uniformity of Australian English’, Orbis 18: 62–73Google Scholar
Bernstein, J. (1991). ‘DPs in French and Walloon: evidence for parametric variation in nominal head movement’, Probus 3: 1–26CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Berrendonner, A. (1993). ‘Sujets zéro’. In S. Karaloc and T. Muryn (eds.), ‘Complétude et incomplétude dans les langues romanes et slaves’. Actes du Ⅵe Colloque de linguistique romane et slave, Cracovie, sept 29–oct 3, Cracow: 178–146
Berruto, G. (1970). Dialetto e società industriale nella Valle d'Andorno. Note per una sociologia dei sistemi linguistici, Supplementi al BALI, Torino
Berruto, G. (1989). ‘Tra italiano e dialetto’. In G. Holtus, M. Metzeltin, and M. Pfister (eds.), La dialettologia italiana oggi. Studi offerti a Manlio Cortelazzo, Tübingen, Narr: 107–122
Berruto, G. (1990). ‘Italiano regionale, commutazione di codice e enunciati mistilingui’. In M. Cortelazzo and A. Mioni (eds.), L'Italiano regionale. Rome: Bulzoni, 105–130
Berruto, G. (1995). Fondamenti di sociolinguistica. Rome, Bari: Laterza
Berruto, G. (1997a). ‘Linguistica del contatto e aspetti dell'italianizzazione dei dialetti: appunti di creolistica casalinga’. In G. Holtus, J. Kramer, and W. Schweickard (eds.), Italica et Romanica. Festschrift für Max Pfister zum 65. Geburtstag, Tübingen, Niemeyer: 13–29
Berruto, G. (1997b). ‘Code-switching and code-mixing’. In M. Maiden and M. Parry (eds.), The Dialects of Italy. London, New York: Routledge, 394–400
Bertz, S. (1975). Der Dubliner Stadtdialekt. Doctoral dissertation, Albert-Ludwigs-Universität, Freiburg
Bertz, S. (1987). ‘Variation in Dublin English’, Teanga 7: 35–53Google Scholar
Bex, T. and Watts, R. J. (eds.) (1999). Standard English. The Widening Debate. London/ New York: RoutledgeCrossRef
Biber, D. (1988). Variation across Speech and Writing. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Biber, D., Johansson, S., Leech, G., Conrad, S., and Finegan, E. (1999). Longman Grammar of Spoken and Written English. Harlow: Pearson Education
Biberauer, T. (to appear). ‘How real is embedded V2? Evidence from Afrikaans’. In F. Hinskens, H. den Besten, and J. Koch (eds.), Afrikaans. Een drieluik. Leipzig: Leipziger Universitätsverlag
Bickerton, D. (1975). Dynamics of a Creole System. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Bickerton, D. (1977). ‘Pidginization and creolization: language acquisition and language universals. In A. Valdman (ed.), Pidgin and Creole Linguistics, Indiana University Press, 49–69
Bjerrum, A. (1973). ‘On bilingualism in Slesvig’. In A. Bjerrum, Linguistic Papers. Copenhagen: Akademisk Forlag, 51–74
Bjerrum, A. (1990). ‘Sprogskiftet i Sydslesvig og dets Årsager’, Danske Folkemål, 32: 1–34Google Scholar
Blanc, H. (1968). ‘The Israeli koine as an emergent national standard. In J. Fishman, C. Ferguson, and J. Das Gupta (eds.), Language Problems of Developing Nations, New York: John Wiley, 237–251
Blanche-Benveniste, C. (1997). ‘La notion de variation syntaxique dans la langue parlée’, Langue Française 115: 19–29CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Blevins, J. (1995). ‘The syllable in phonological theory’. In J. Goldsmith (ed.), The Handbook of Phonological Theory. Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 206–244
Blom, J. P. and Gumperz, J. J. (1972, 2nd edn. 1986). ‘Social meaning in linguistic structures: codeswitching in Norway’. In J. J. Gumperz and D. Hymes, Directions in Sociolinguistics. The Ethnography of Communication. Oxford and New York: Basil Blackwell, 407–434
Bloomfield, L. (1933). Language. London: Unwin, 9th reprint (1969)
Boberg, C. (2000). ‘Geolinguistic diffusion and the U.S.–Canada border, Language Variation and Change 12: 1–24CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Boeschoten, H. (1997). ‘Convergence and divergence in migrant Turkish’. In K. Mattheier (ed.), Dialect and Migration in a Changing Europe. Frankfurt am Main: Lang, 145–154
Bohnenberger, K. (1913). Die Mundart der deutschen Walliser im Heimattal und in den Aussenorten. (= Beiträge zur Schweizerdeutschen Mundart 6). Frauenfeld
Boissevain, J. (1974). Friends of Friends. Networks, Manipulators and Coalitions. Oxford: Blackwell
Boissevain, J. (1987). ‘Social network’. In U. Ammon, N. Dittmar, and K. J. Mattheier (eds.), Sociolinguistics. An International Handbook of Language and Society, (Vol. 1). Berlin/New York: Walter de Gruyter. 164–169
Bolognesi, R. (2001). ‘L'arcaicità del Sardo fra stereotipi e teoria del mutamento linguistico’, MS
Borer, H. and Wexler, K. (1987). ‘The maturation of syntax’. In T. Roeper, and E. Williams (eds.), Parameter Setting, Dordrecht: Reidel, 123–172CrossRef
Börjars, K. and Chapman, C. (1998). ‘Agreement and pro-drop in some dialects of English’, Linguistics 36: 71–98CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Börjars, K., Vincent, N., and Chapman, C. (1996). ‘Paradigms, periphrases and pronominal inflection: a feature-based account’. In G. Booij and J. van Marl (eds.), Yearbook of Morphology 1996, Dordrecht: Kluwer, 155–180
Bortoni-Ricardo, S. M. (1985). The Urbanization of Rural Dialect Speakers. A Sociolinguistic study in Brazil. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Bott, E. (1957, 2nd edn. 1971). Family and Social Network. London: Tavistock
Bourciez, É. (1967). Éléments de linguistique romane. 5th edn. Révisée par l'auteur et par les soins de Jean Bourciez, Paris
Bourdieu, P. (1984). ‘Capital et marché linguistiques’, Linguistische Berichte 90: 324Google Scholar
Boyce-Hendricks, J. (1998). ‘Immigration and dialect convergence: on the rise in the use of the reflexive pronoun zich in the city dialects of early modern Holland’, Paper presented at the ESF Conference. ‘The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe’ September. University of Reading:17–19
Bozzini, M. (1994), ‘Sulla commutazione di codice italiano/dialetto in Ticino’, unpublished M.A. thesis, University of Zurich
Brandi, P. and Cordin, P. (1989). ‘Two Italian dialects and the null subject parameter’. In Jaeggli and Safir, (eds.): 111–142CrossRef
Brannigan, P. (1996). ‘Tracing that- trace variation’. In J. R. Black and V. Motapanyane (eds.), Microparametric Syntax and Dialect Variation. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 25–40CrossRef
Bredsdorff, J. H. 1933 (1817). ‘Prøve af en efter Udtalen indrettet dansk Retskrivning’. In J. Glahder (ed.), J. H. Bredsdorffs Udvalgte Afhandlinger. Copenhagen: Levin & Munksgaards Forlag
Bresnan, J. (1995). ‘Linear order, syntactic rank and empty categories: on weak cross-over’. In M. Dalrymple, R. M. Kaplan, J. T. Maxwell, and A. Zaenen (eds.), Formal Issues in Lexical-Functional Grammar, Stanford: CSLI, 241–274
Brink, L. and Lund, J. (1975). Dansk Rigsmål 1–2. Lydudviklingen siden 1840 med særlig henblik på sociolekterne i København. Copenhagen: Gyldendal
Britain, D. (1997a). ‘Was/weren't levelling in the East Anglian Fens’. Essex Research Reports in Linguistics. Colchester: University of Essex
Britain, D. (1997b). ‘Dialect contact, focusing and phonological rule complexity: the koineisation of Fenland English’. In C. Boberg, M. Meyerhoff, and S. Strassel (eds.), A Selection of Papers from NWAVE 25. University of Pennsylvania Working Papers in Linguistics, 4 (1): 141–170
Britain, D. (1997c). ‘Dialect contact and phonological reallocation: “Canadian Raising” in the English Fens’, Language in Society 26: 15–46CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Britain, D. (1999). ‘As far as analysing grammatical variation and change in New Zealand English <is concerned/ø>’. In A. Bell and K. Kuiper (eds.), New Zealand English. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 198–220
Britain, D. (2002a) ‘Diffusion, levelling, simplification and reallocation in past tense BE in the English Fens’, Journal of Sociolinguistics 6(1): 16–43CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Britain, D. (2002b). ‘Space and spatial diffusion’. In J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill, and N. Schilling-Estes (eds.), The Handbook of Language Variation and Change. Oxford: Blackwell, 603–637
Britain, D. (2002c). ‘Phoenix from the ashes?: the death, contact, and birth of dialects in England’, Essex Research Reports in Linguistics 41: 42–73Google Scholar
Britain, D. (2003). ‘Geolinguistics – diffusion of language’, in U. Ammon, N. Dittmar, K. Mattheier and P. Trudgill (eds.), Sociolinguistics/Soziolinguistik. An International Handbook of the Science of Language and Society. 2nd edn. Vol. Ⅰ, Berlin: de Gruyter, 34–48
Britain, D. (forthcoming). ‘Where did New Zealand English come from?’ In R. Harlow, D. Starks, and A. Bell (eds.), The Languages of New Zealand. Wellington: Victoria University Press
Britain, D. and Trudgill, P. J. (1999). ‘Migration, new-dialect formation and sociolinguistic refunctionalisation: reallocation as an outcome of dialect contact’, Transactions of the Philological Society, 97: 245–256CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Brøndum-Nielsen, J. (1951). Studier og Tydninger. Copenhagen: Schultz
Brown, G. (1972). Phonological Rules and Dialect Variation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Brown, L. A. (1981). Innovation Diffusion. London: Methuen
Brown, R. and Gilman, A. (1960). ‘The pronouns of power and solidarity’. In T. A. Sebeok (ed.), Style in Language. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 253–276
Bücherl, R. F. J. (1982). ‘Regularitäten bei Dialektveränderung und Dialektvariation. Empirisch untersucht am Vokalismus nord-/ mittelbairischer Übergangsdialekte’, Zeitschrift für Dialektologie und Linguistik 49: 1–27Google Scholar
Bullier, A. J. (1981). Le parler franco-mauricien au Natal: une enclave francophone en Afrique du Sud: éléments d'une phonologie. Paris
Burt, R. S. (1984). ‘Network items and the General Social Survey’, Social Networks 6: 293–339CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Burzio, L. (1986). Italian Syntax: A Government-Binding Approach. Dordrecht: D. ReidelCrossRef
Butskhrikidze, M. and J. van de Weijer (2001). ‘On de-affrication in Modern Georgian’. In T. van der Wouden and H. Broekhuis (eds.), Linguistics in the Netherlands 2001. Amsterdam Philadelphia: Benjamins, 41–51
Butters, R. R. (1990). ‘Current issues in variation theory’. Paper presented at the First International Congress of Dialectologists, 2 August, University of Bamberg
Bybee, J. (2003). ‘Mechanisms of change in grammaticalization: the role of frequency’. In R. Janda and B. Joseph (eds.), Handbook of Historical Linguistics. Oxford: Blackwell, 602–623CrossRef
Bynon, T. (1983). Historical Linguistics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Byrne, A. (1996). ‘An investigation of some extrinsic and intrinsic constraints exerting pressure on phonological variation in Hiberno-English’. Unpublished project report, School of Clinical Speech and Language Studies, Trinity College Dublin
Cajot, J. (1990). ‘Neue Sprachgrenzbildung an der deutschen Staatsgrenze zu Niederländisch-Ostlimburg, Ostbelgien und Luxembourg’. In Kremer and Niebaum (eds.), 125–152
Callary, R. (1975). ‘Phonological change and the development of an urban dialect in Illinois’, Language in Society 4: 155–170CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cameron, R. (1992). ‘Pronominal and null subject variation in Spanish: constraints, dialects and Functional Compensation. Unpublished Ph.D. diss., University of Pennsylvania
Carden, Guy (1976). Syntactic and semantic data: replication results. Language in Society: S. 99–104CrossRef
Carroll, S. (1983). ‘Remarks on FOR-TO infinitives’, Linguistic Analysis 12: 415–451Google Scholar
Carter, R. and McCarthy, M. (1999). ‘The English get-passive in spoken discourse: description and implications for an interpersonal grammar’, English Language and Linguistics 3: 41–58CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cedergren, H. and Sankoff, D. (1974). ‘Variable rules: performance as a statistical reflection of competence’, Language 50: 333–355CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Chambers, J. K. (1979). ‘Canadian English’. In J. K. Chambers (ed.), The Languages of Canada. Montreal: Didier
Chambers, J. K. (2002). ‘Patterns of variation including change’. In J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill, and N. Schilling-Estes (eds.), Handbook of Language Variation and Change. Malden, Mass., and Oxford: Blackwell, 349–372
Chambers, J. K. (2003). Sociolinguistic Theory. 2nd edn. Oxford: Blackwell
Chambers, J. K. and Trudgill, P. J. (1980) Dialectology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Chambers, J. K. and Trudgill, P. J. (1998). Dialectology. 2nd edn. Cambridge: Cambridge University PressCrossRef
Chapman, C. (1995a). ‘A subject–verb agreement hierarchy: evidence from analogical change in modern English dialects’. In R. M. Hogg and L. van Bergen (eds.), Historical Linguistics, Vol. 2, Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 35–44
Cheshire, J. (1982). Variation in an English Dialect: A Sociolinguistic Study. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Cheshire, J. (1985). ‘Never and the problem of where grammars stop’, Polyglot 6, Fiche 1: Dept of Applied Linguistics, Birkbeck College, London
Cheshire, J. (1987). ‘Syntactic variation, the linguistic variable and sociolinguistic theory’, Linguistics 25: 257–282CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cheshire, J. (1991a). ‘Variation in the use of ain't in an urban British English dialect’, in Trudgill and Chambers (eds.): 54–73
Cheshire, J. (1991b) (ed.), English Around the World. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Cheshire, J. (1994). ‘Standardization and the English irregular verbs’. In D. Stein and I. Tieken-Boon (eds.), Towards a Standard English. Amsterdam: Mouton de Gruyter, 115–133
Cheshire, J. (1995). ‘That jacksprat: an interactional perspective on English that’, Journal of Pragmatics 25: 369–393CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cheshire, J., (1998). ‘Taming the vernacular: some repercussions for the study of syntactic variation and spoken grammar’, Te Reo: Journal of the Linguistics Society of New Zealand 41: 6–27Google Scholar
Cheshire, J. (1999). ‘Spoken standard English’, In T. Bex and R. J. Watts (eds.), Standard English: The Widening Debate. London: Routledge, 129–148
Cheshire, J. (2002a). ‘Sex and gender in variationist research’. In J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill, and N. Schilling-Estes (eds.), Handbook of Language Variation and Change. Malden, Mass., and Oxford: Blackwell, 423–443
Cheshire, J. (2002b). ‘Border crossing: syntactic and pragmatic variation’. Plenary lecture, Methods in Dialectology Ⅺ, Joensuu, Finland, 6 August 2002
Cheshire, J. (in press). ‘Syntactic variation and beyond: gender and social class variation in the use of discourse-new markers’, Journal of Sociolinguistics
Cheshire, J. and Edwards, V. (1991). ‘Children as sociolinguistic researchers’, Linguistics and Education 3: 225–250CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cheshire, J. and Stein, D. (1997). ‘Nonstandard and standard syntax’. In J. Cheshire and D. Stein (eds.), Taming the Vernacular: From Dialect to Written Standard Language. Harlow: Longman, 1–12
Cheshire, J. and Williams, A. (2002). ‘Information structure in male and female adolescent talk’, Journal of English Linguistics 30: 217–238CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cheshire, J., Edwards, V., and Whittle, P. (1989). ‘Urban British dialect grammar: the question of dialect levelling’, English Worldwide 10: 185–225CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cheshire, J., Kerswill, P., and Williams, A. (1999). ‘The role of adolescents in dialect levelling’. Final report submitted to the Economic and Social Research Council (ref. R000236180)
Chirrey, D. (1999). ‘Edinburgh: descriptive material’. In P. Foulkes, and G. J. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 223–229
Cholewa, Jªrgen (1993). ‘Störungen der lexikalisch-morphologischen Wortverarbeitung bei Aphasie: Ein Literaturüberblick’, In Neurolinguistik 7 (2): 105–126Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. (1976). ‘Conditions on rules of grammar’, Linguistic Analysis 2: 303–351Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. (1981a). Lectures on Government and Binding. Dordrecht: Foris
Chomsky, N. (1981b). ‘Principles and parameters in syntactic theory’. In N. Hornstein and D. Lightfoot (eds.), Explanation in Linguistics. London: Longman, 32–75
Chomsky, N. (1982). Some Concepts and Consequences of the Theory of Government and Binding. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press
Chomsky, N. (1986a). Barriers. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press
Chomsky, N. (1986b). Knowledge of Language: Its Nature, Origin and Use. New York: Praeger
Chomsky, N. (1989). ‘Some notes on the economy of derivation and representation’. In I. Laka and A. Mahajan (eds.), MIT Working Papers in Linguistics 10: Functional Heads and Clause Structure, Cambridge, Mass.: Dept of Linguistics and Philosophy, MIT, 43–74
Chomsky, N. (1993). ‘A minimalist program for linguistic theory’. In K. Hale and S. J. Keyser (eds.), The View from Building 20. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1–52
Chomsky, N. (1995). The Minimalist Program. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press
Chomsky, N. (1999). ‘Derivations by Phase’. Unpublished MS., MIT
Chomsky, N. and Lasnik, H. (1977). ‘Filters and control’, Linguistic Inquiry 8: 425–504Google Scholar
Christen, Helen (1998). ‘Convergence and divergence in the Swiss German dialects’. In P. Auer (ed.), Dialect levelling and the standard varieties in Europe. Folia Linguistica, 32: 1/2, 53–67CrossRef
Christen, Helen (2000). ‘Chamäleons und Fossilien’. In D. Stellmacher (ed.), Dialektologie zwischen Tradition und Neuansätzen. Stuttgart: Steiner, 33–47
Christensen, K. and Taraldsen, K. (1989). ‘Expletive chain formation and past participle agreement in Scandinavian dialects’. In Benincà (ed.): 53–84
Christian, D., Wolfram, W., and Dube, N. (1988). Variation and Change in Geographically Isolated Communities: Appalachian English and Ozark English. Publication of the American Dialect Society, 74, Tuscaloosa, Al.: University of Alabama Press
Clahsen, H. (1991). ‘Constraints on parameter setting: a grammatical analysis of some acquisition stages in German child language’, Language Acquisition 1: 361–391CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Clahsen, H. and Muysken, P. (1986). ‘The availability of UG to adult and child learners: the study of acquisition of German word order’, Second Language Research 2: 92–119Google Scholar
Clark, T. L. (1972). Marietta, Ohio: The Continuing Erosion of a Language Island. Publication of the American Dialect Society, 57. Alabama
Clarke, S. (1986). ‘Sociolinguistic patterning in a New World dialect of Hiberno-English’. In Harris et al. (eds.), Perspectives on the English Language in Ireland. Dublin: CLCS, Trinity College Dublin, 67–81
Clarke, S. (1991). ‘Phonological variation and recent language change in St John's English’. In J. Cheshire, English Around the World: Sociolinguistic Perspectives. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 108–122
Clarke, S. (1997). ‘The role of Irish English in the formation of New World Englishes: the case from Newfoundland’. In J. Kallen (ed.), Focus on Ireland. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 207–225CrossRef
Clemmensen, N. (1994). ‘Bondevenner og bondevenner – to alen af et stykke? En komparativ undersøgelse af de danske og norske bondevenneorganisationer’, Fortid og Nutid 2: 134–157Google Scholar
Clemmensen, N. 2002. ‘Adel under pres. Tysk eller dansk “Sonderweg”’, Historisk Tidsskrift, 102(2): 451–467Google Scholar
Clyne, M. (1967). Transference and Triggering. The Hague: Nijhoff
Coates, J. (1986). Women, Men and Language. London/New York: Longman
Coetsem, F. van (2000). A General and Unified Theory of the Transmission Process in Languge Contact. Heidelberg: Universitätsverlag C. Winter
Collins, B. and Mees, I. M. (1996). ‘Spreading everywhere? How recent a phenomenon is glottalisation in Received Pronunciation?’, English World-Wide 17: 175–187CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cornips, L. (1994). Syntactische variatie in het Algemeen Nederlands van Heerlen (Syntactic variation in Heerlen Dutch). IFOTT 6. Dordrecht: ICG-Printing
Cornips, L. (1996a). ‘The spread of the reflexive adjunct middle in the Limburg dialects: 1885–1994’. In C. Cremer and M. Den Dikken (eds.), Linguistics in the Netherlands 1996. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 45–60
Cornips, L. (1996b). ‘Social stratification, linguistic constraints and inherent variability in Heerlen Dutch: the use of the infinitival complementizers om/voor’. In Arnold et al. (eds.): 453–468
Cornips, L. (1997). ‘De betrouwbaarheid van de schriftelijke enquête Willems (1885): De adjunct middel in de Limburgse dialecten’, Gramma/TTT 5 (2): 61–76Google Scholar
Cornips, L. (1998a). ‘Syntactic variation, parameters and their social distribution’, Language Variation and Change 10 (1): 1–21CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cornips, L. (1998b). ‘Political borders and converging/diverging dialects and dialects/standard languages in Limburg (The Netherlands) and the surrounding area in Rhineland (Germany) between 1885 and 1994’, Paper presented at the ESF Conference: The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe, 17–19 September, University of Reading
Cornips, L. (2000). ‘Variatie in reflexieve middel-constructies in het Heerlense dialect en in de Rijnlandse dialecten’. In H. den Besten, E. Elffers, and J. Luif (eds.), Samengevoegde Woorden. Amsterdam: Dept of Dutch Linguistics, University of Amsterdam, 33–45
Cornips, L. (2000). ‘The use of gaan + infinitive in narratives of older bilingual children of Moroccan and Turkish descent’. In H. de Hoop and T. van der Wouden (eds.), Linguistics in the Netherlands 2000, 57–67
Cornips, L. and Hulk, A. (1996). ‘Ergative reflexives in Heerlen Dutch and French’, Studia Linguistica 50 (1): 1–21CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cornips, L. and Hulk, A. (1999). ‘Affected objects in Heerlen Dutch and Romance’, Languages in Contrast 1(2): 191–210CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Cornips, L. and Hulk, A. (2002). ‘Argumentreductie en aspekt in onpersoonlijke intransitieve constructies’, Nederlandse Taalkunde 17, 1. 2–19Google Scholar
Corrigan, K. P. (1993). ‘Hiberno-English syntax: nature vs. nurture in a creole setting’, Newcastle and Durham Working Papers in Linguistics 1: 95–131Google Scholar
Corrigan, K. P. (1996). ‘The acquisition and properties of a contact vernacular grammar’. In A. Ahlqvist and V. Čapková (eds.), Dán do Oide. Dublin: Linguistics Institute of Ireland, 75–94
Corrigan, K. P. (1997). ‘The Syntax of South Armagh English in its Socio-historical Perspective’. Unpub. Ph.D. diss. University College Dublin
Corrigan, K. P. (1998). ‘Inviting the ugly sisters to the ball’. Paper presented at the ESF Conference: The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe, 17–19 September, University of Reading
Corrigan, K. P. (2000). ‘What are small clauses doing in South Armagh English, Irish and Planter English?’ In H. L. C. Tristram (ed.), Celtic Englishes Ⅱ. Heidelberg: Carl Winter Verlag, 75–96
Corrigan, K. P. (2003). ‘For-to infinitives and beyond: interdisciplinary approaches to non-finite complementation in a rural Celtic English’. In H. L. C. Tristram (ed.), Celtic Englishes Ⅲ. Heidelberg: Carl Winter Verlag, 318–338
Coseriu, E. (1974). Synchronie, Diachronie und Geschichte. Das Problem des Sprachwandels. Übers. v. Helga Sohre. Munich
Coseriu, E. (1980). ‘“Historische Sprache” und “Dialekt”’. In J. Göschel, P. Ivic, and K. Kehr (eds.), Dialekt und Dialektologie. Wiesbaden: Steiner, 106–122
Coseriu, E. (1981). ‘Los conceptos de “dialecto”, “nivel” y “estilo de lengua” y el sentido proprio de la dialectología’, Lingua española actual 3 (1): 1–32Google Scholar
Coulmas, F. (ed.) (1997). The Handbook of Sociolinguistics. Oxford: Blackwell
Couper-Kuhlen, E. (1996). ‘The prosody of repetition: on quoting and mimicry’. In E. Couper-Kuhlen and M. Selting (eds.), Prosody in Conversation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 366–405CrossRef
Coupland, N. (1980). ‘Style-shifting in a Cardiff work-setting’, Language in Society 9: 1–12CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Coupland, N. (1984). ‘Accommodation at work: some phonological data and their implications’, International Journal of the Sociology of Language 46: 49–70Google Scholar
Coupland, N. (1988). Dialect in Use: Sociolinguistic Variation in Cardiff English. Cardiff: University of Wales Press
Coveney, A. (1997). ‘L'approche variationniste et la description de la grammaire du français’, Langue Française 115: 88–100CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Coveney, A. (2000). ‘Vestiges of nous and the 1st person plural verb in informal spoken French’, Language Sciences 22: 447–481CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Coveney, A. (2002). ‘Supplement: a critical survey of recent research on grammatical variability, negation and interrogation in French’, Variability in Spoken French. Bristol: Intellect
Craig, C. (1997). ‘Language contact and language degeneration’. In F. Coulmas (ed.), The Handbook of Sociolinguistics. Oxford: Blackwell, 257–270
Crain, S. (1991). ‘Language acquisition in the absence of experience’, Behavioral and Brain Sciences 14: 597–650CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Crowley, T. (1992). An Introduction to Historical Linguistics. 2nd edn. Oxford: Oxford University Press
Cuevas, I. (2001). ‘Variación social, reticular e individual de las consonantes obstruyentes palatales y dentales en Nueva Málaga’. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis. Área de Lingüística General. Málaga: Universidad de Málaga
Cukor-Avila, P. and Bailey, G. (1996). ‘The spread of urban AAVE: a case study’, in Arnold et al. (eds.): 469–485
Daan, J. (1987). Ik was te bissie … Nederlanders en hun taal in de Verenigde Staten. Zutphen: Walburg
Daan, J., Deprez, K., van Hout, R., and Stroop, J. (1985). Onze veranderende taal. Utrecht/Antwerp: spectrum
Dailey-O'Cain, J. (2000). ‘The sociolinguistic distribution and attitudes towards focuser like and quotative like’, Journal of Sociolinguistics 4: 60–80CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Dal Negro, S. (1998). ‘The Swiss/Italian border: The emergence of new verbal morphosyntax in a Walser dialect’. Paper presented at the ESF Conference: The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe, 17–19 September, University of Reading
Damsholt, T. (2000). Fædrelandskærlighed og Borgerdyd. Copenhagen: Museum Tusculanum
Dauzat, A. (1922). La géographie linguistique. Paris: Flammarion
Davies, P. (1992). ‘The non-Bejing dialect component in Modern Standard Chinese’. In K. Bolton and H. Kwok (eds.), Sociolinguistics Today. International Perspectives. London/New York: Routledge, 192–206
De Graff, M. (1997). ‘Verb syntax in, and beyond, creolization’. In Haegeman (ed.): 64–94
De Vink, L. (2004). ‘Dialect en dialectverandering in Katwijk aan Zee’. Ph.D. thesis, University of Leiden
De Wulf, E., Taeldeman, J. (forthcoming). ‘Apocope en insertie van –n na sjwa in de zuidelijke Nederlandse dialecten: conditionering en geografie’. To appear in Taal en Tongval
Den Besten, H. Muysken, P., and Smith, N. (1995). ‘Theories focusing on the European input’. In Arends, Muysken, L. and Smith (eds.), 87–98
Denning, K., Inkelas, S., McNair-Knox, F., and Rickford, J. (eds.) (1987). Variation in Language. NWAV-ⅩⅤ at Stanford
Deprez, K. (1981). Naar een eigen identiteit. Resultaten en evaluatie van tien jaar taalsociologisch en sociolingudstisch onderzoek betreffende de standaardtaal in Vlaanderen. Ph.D. thesis, University of Leuven
Déprez, V. and Pierce, A. (1993). ‘Negation and functional projections in early grammar’, Linguistic Inquiry 24: 25–67Google Scholar
Dewulf, H., Keymeulen, J., and Verstraete, F. (1981). ‘Westvlaamse expansie en standaardizering: een sociolingudstische benadering’, Taal en tongval 33, 52–61Google Scholar
Dillard, J. L. (1972). Black English: Its History and Usage in the United States. New York: Random House
Dines, E. (1980). ‘Variation in discourse – and stuff like that’, Language in Society 9: 13–31CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Dinges, G. (1923). ‘Ueber unsere Mundarten’. In Beiträge zur Heimatkunde des deutschen Wolgagebiets. Mit einer Karte und einer Tabelle. Pokrowsk a/W: 60–72
Dinges, G. (1925). ‘Zur Erforschung der wolgadeutschen Mundarten. (Ergebnisse und Aufgaben)’, Teuthonista 1(4): 299–313Google Scholar
Dittmar, N. and Schlobinski, P. (1985). ‘Die Bedeutung von sozialen Netzwerken für die Erforschung von Ortssprachen’. In W. Besch and K. J. Mattheier (eds.), Ortssprachenforschung. Beiträge zu einem Bonner Kolloquium. Berlin: Erich Schmidt Verlag, 158–188
Dixon, R. M. W. (1991). A New Approach to English Grammar on Semantic Principles. Oxford: Clarendon Press
Docherty, G. J. and Foulkes, P. (1999). ‘Derby and Newcastle: instrumental phonetics and variationist studies’. In P. Foulkes and G. J. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 47–71
Docherty, G., Foulkes, P., Parsons, L., Thompson, J., Tillotson, J., and Watt, D. (2000). ‘Phonological variation in child-directed speech’. Paper presented at VIEW 2000, 14–16 September, University of Essex
Docherty, G. J., Foulkes, P., Milroy, J., Milroy, L., and Walshaw, D. (1997). ‘Descriptive adequacy in phonology: a variationist perspective’, Journal of Linguistics 33: 275–310CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Donnan, H. and Wilson, T. (1994). ‘An anthropology of frontiers’. In H. Donnan and T. Wilson (eds.), Border Approaches: Anthropological Perspectives on Frontiers. Lanham, Maryland: University Press of America, 1–14
Dressler, W. U. (1986). ‘Explanation in natural morphology, illustrated with comparative and agent-noun formation’, Linguistics 24: 519–548CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Dulson, A. (1933). ‘Einige lautliche Eigentümlichkeiten der wolgadeutschen Mundarten’. In Revolution und Kultur 5. Engels: 46–54Google Scholar
Dulson, A. (1941). ‘Problema skreschtschenija dialektow po materialam jasyka nemzew Powolshja’. In Iswestija Akademii nauk Sojusa SSR, Otdelenie literatury i jasyka 3: 82–96Google Scholar
Dyer, J. A. (2000). ‘Language and identity in a Scottish-English community: a phonological and discoursal analysis’. Ph.D. thesis, University of Michigan
Dyer, J. A. (2002). ‘“We all speak the same round here.” Dialect levelling in a Scottish-English community’, Journal of Sociolinguistics 6: 99–116CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Eckert, P. (1988). ‘Sound change and adolescent social structure’, Language in Society 17: 183–207CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Eckert, P. (1989a). Jocks and Burnouts: Social Categories and Identity in the High School. New York: Teachers College Press
Eckert, P. (1989b). ‘The whole woman: sex and gender differences in variation’, Language Change and Variation 1: 245–268CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Eckert, P. (2000). Linguistic Variation as Social Practice. Oxford: Blackwell
Edwards, V. (1993). ‘The grammar of southern British English.’ In J. Milroy and L. Milroy (eds.), Real English: The Grammar of English Dialects in the British Isles. London: Longman, 214–238
Edwards, V., Trudgill, P. J., and Weltens, B. (1984). The Grammar of English Dialect: A Survey of Research. London: ESRC
Eisenberg, P. (1994). Grundriss der deutschen Grammatik. 3rd edn. Stuttgart: MetzlerCrossRef
Eisikovits, E. (1991a). ‘Variation in the lexical verb in inner-Sydney English’, in Trudgill and Chambers (eds.): 120–144
Eisikovits, E. (1991b). ‘Variation in subject–verb agreement in Inner Sydney English’. In J. Cheshire (ed.), English around the World: Sociolinguistic Perspectives. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 235–255
Elordui, A. (1998). ‘Changes in the verb–object agreement system of some Basque dialects’, paper presented at the conference: The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe, 17–19 September, Reading
Engelking, A. (1999). ‘The natsyas of the Grodno region of Belarus: a field study’, Nations and Nationalism 5 (2), 175–206CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Epstein, R. (1994). ‘The development of the definite article in French’. In W. Pagliuca, (ed.), Perspectives on Grammaticalisation. [Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, 109]. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 63–80CrossRef
Epstein, R. (1995). ‘The later stages in the development of the definite article: evidence from French’. In H. Andersen (ed.), Historical Linguistics, 1993. Papers from the 11th International Conference on Historical Linguistics 16–20 August, 1993. [Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, 124]. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 159–175CrossRef
Erman, B. (1993). ‘Female and male usage of pragmatic expressions in same-sex and mixed-sex interaction’, Language Variation and Change 4: 217–234CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Ervin, S. and Osgood, C. (1954). ‘Second language learning and bilingualism’, Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49: 139–146Google Scholar
Faarlund, J. T. (1985). ‘Pragmatics in diachronic syntax’, Studies in Language 9: 363–393CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Fagan, S. (1992). The Syntax and Semantics of Middle Constructions. A Study with Special Reference to German. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Farrar, K. and Jones, M. C. (2002). ‘Introduction’. In K. Farrar and M. C. Jones (eds.), Language Change: The Interplay of Internal, External and Extra-Linguistic Factors. New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 1–16CrossRef
Fasold, R. W. (1978). ‘Language variation and linguistic competence’. In D. Sankoff (ed.), Linguistic Variation: Models and Methods. London: Academic Press, 85–95
Fasold, R. W. (1984). The Sociolinguistics of Society. Oxford: Blackwell
Fasold, R. W. (1990). The Sociolinguistics of Language. Oxford: Blackwell
Fasold, R. W. (1991). ‘The quiet demise of variable rules’, American Speech 66: 3–21CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Fasold, R. and Schiffrin, D. (eds.) (1989). Language Change and Variation. Amsterdam: John Benjamins
Feagin, C. (1979). Variation and Change in Alabama English: A Sociolinguistics Study of the White Community. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press
Feldbæk, O. (1990). ‘Den lange Fred’. In O. Olsen (ed.), Gyldendal og Politikens Danmarkshistorie 1700–1800, Vol. 9. Copenhagen: Gyldendal & Politiken
Feldbæk, O. (ed.) (1991–92). Dansk Identitetshistorie, Vols. 1–4. Copenhagen: C. A. Reitzel
Feldbæk, O. (1994). ‘National identity in eighteenth-century Denmark’. In C. Bjørn, A. Grant, and K. Stringer (eds.), Nations, Nationalism and Patriotism in the European Past. Copenhagen: Academic Press, 137–145
Ferrara, K. and Bell, B. (1995). ‘Sociolinguistic variation and discourse function of constructed dialogue introducers: the case of be + like’, American Speech 70: 265–289CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Filppula, M. (1995). ‘The story of language contact in Ireland: how unique, how universal?’, Teanga 15: 31–48Google Scholar
Foldvik, A. K. (n.d.). ‘The pronunciation of r in Norwegian with special reference to the spread of dorsal r’. Unpublished paper
Foley, J. (1977). Foundations of Theoretical Phonology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Ford, C. E. (2001). ‘At the intersection of turn and sequence: negation and what comes next’. In M. Selting and E. Couper-Kuhlen (eds.), Studies in Interactional Linguistics. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 51–79CrossRef
Foulkes, P. and Docherty, G. (eds.) (1999). Urban voices. Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold
Foulkes, P., Docherty, G., and Watt, D. J. L. (1999). ‘Tracking the emergence of structured variation’, Leeds Working Papers in Linguistics and Phonetics 7: 1–25Google Scholar
Foulkes, P. and Docherty, G. (1999). ‘Urban voices: overview’. In P. Foulkes and G. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 1–24
Foulkes, P. and Docherty, G. (2000). ‘Another chapter in the story of /r/: “labiodental” variants in British English’, Journal of Sociolinguistics 4: 30–59CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Franceschini, R. (1998). ‘Code-switching and the notion of code in linguistics: proposals for a dual focus model’. In P. Auer (ed.), Code-Switching in Conversation. Language, interaction and identity. London/New York: Routledge, 51–72
Friedemann, M.-A. and Rizzi, L. (eds.) (2000). The Acquisition of Syntax. London: Longman
Frings, Th. (1936). Die Grundlagen des Meissnischen Deutsch. Halle (Niemeyer)
Frings, Th. (1956). Sprache und Geschichte. Halle: Max Niemeyer Verlag
Gadet, F. (1997). ‘La variation, plus qu'une écume’, Langue Française 115: 5–18CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Gal, S. (1979). Language Shift: Social Determinants of Linguistic Change in Bilingual Austria. New York: Academic Press
Gal, S. (1998). ‘Cultural bases of language use among German-speakers in Hungary’. In P. Trudgill and J. Cheshire (eds.): The Sociolinguistics Reader. Vol. 1: Multilingualism and Variation. London: 113–121
Gamrath, H. (1980). Københavns Historie, Vol. 2. Copenhagen: Gyldendal
García, E. C. (1985). ‘Shifting variation’, Lingua 67: 189–224CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Geeraerts, D., Grondelaers, S., and Speelman, D. (1999). Convergentie en divergentie in de Nederlandse woordenschat. Een onderzoek naar kleding-en voetbaltermen. Amsterdam: Publikaties van het Meertensinstituut
Geerts, G. (1983). ‘Brabant als een centrum van standaardtaalontwikkeling in Vlaanderen’, Forum der Letteren 24: 55–63Google Scholar
Geerts, G., Haeseryn, W., de Rooy, J., and Van den Toorn, M. (eds.) (1984). Algemene Nederlandse Spraakkunst. Groningen: Wolters-Noordhoff
Gerner, H. 1919 (1690). ‘Epitome Philologiæ Danicæ’, in H. Bertelsen (ed.), Danske Grammatikere, Vol. 3. Copenhagen: Gyldendal, 251–318
Gerritsen, M. (1999). ‘Divergence of dialects in a linguistic laboratory near the Belgian–Dutch–German border: similar dialects under the influence of different standard languages’, Language Variation and Change 11 (1): 43–66CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Giacalone Ramat, A. (1995). ‘Code-switching in the context of dialect/standard language relations’. In L. Milroy and P. Muysken (eds.), One speaker, Two Languages. Cross-disciplinary Perspectives on Code-switching. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 45–67CrossRef
Giegerich, Heinz, J. (1992). English Phonology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Giles, H. (1973). ‘Accent mobility: a model and some data. Anthropological Linguistics 15, 87–105Google Scholar
Giles, H. (ed.) (1984). The Dynamics of Speech Accommodation. International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 46
Giles, H. and Bourhis, R. Y. (1976). ‘Black speakers with white speech – a real problem?’ In G. Nickel (ed.), Proceedings of the 4th International Congress Applied Linguistics Vol. 1, Stuttgart: Hochschul-Verlag, 575–84
Giles, H., Bourhis, R., and Taylor, D. (1977). ‘Towards a theory of language in inter-ethnic group relations’. In H. Giles (ed.), Language, Ethnicity and Intergroup Relations. London: Academic Press, 307–348
Giles, H. and Coupland, N. (1991). Language: Contexts and Consequences. Milton Keynes: Open University Press
Giles, H., Coupland, N., and Coupland, J. (1991). ‘Accommodation theory. Communication, context, and consequences’. In idem (eds.), Contexts of Accommodation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, and Paris: Éditions de la maison des sciences de l'homme, 1–68CrossRef
Giles, H., Hewstone, M., Ryan, E. B., and Johnson, P. (1987). ‘Research on language attitudes’. In U. Ammon, N. Dittmar, and K. J. Mattheier (eds.), Sociolinguistics. An International Handbook of the Science of Language and Society. Berlin/New York: Walter de Gruyter, 585–598
Giles, H., Mulac, A., Bradac J., and Johnson, P. (1987). ‘Speech accommodation theory: the first decade and beyond’. In M. McLaughlin (ed.), Communication Yearbook, 10. Beverley Hills: Sage, 13–48CrossRef
Giles, H. and Powesland, P. (1997/1975). ‘Accommodation theory’. In N. Coupland and A. Jaworski (eds.), Sociolinguistics: A Reader. Basingstoke: Macmillan, 232–239. (Reprinted from Giles, H. and Powesland, P. (1975). Speech Style and Social Evaluation. London: Academic Press, 154–170.)
Giles, H. and Powesland, P. F. (1975). Speech Style and Social Evaluation. London: 154–185
Giles, H. and Ryan, E. B. (1982). ‘Prolegomena for developing a social psychological theory of language attitudes’. In Ryan and Giles (eds.): 208–223
Giles, H. and Smith, P. M. (1979). ‘Accommodation theory: optimal levels of convergence’. In H. Giles and R. St. Clair (eds.), Language and Social Psychology. Oxford: Oxford University Press
Gilles, P. (1998a). ‘Virtual convergence and dialect levelling in Luxembourgish’. In P. Auer (ed.), Dialect Levelling and the Standard Varieties in Europe, Folia Linguistica 32: 1–2, 69–82
Gilles, P. (1998b). ‘Die Emanzipation des Lëtzebuergeschen aus dem Gefüge der deutschen Mundarten’, Zeitschrift für deutsche Philologie, 117: 20–35Google Scholar
Gilles, P. (1999). Dialektausgleich im Lëtzebuergeschen: zur phonetisch-phonologischen Fokussierung einer Nationalsprache. Tübingen: Niemeyer
Glauser, B. (2000). ‘The Scottish/English border in hindsight’. In J. Kallen, F. Hinskens and J. Taeldeman (eds.), 65–78CrossRef
Glinka, S., et al. (eds.) (1980). Atlas gwar wschodniosłowiańskich Białostocczyzny [Atlas of East Slavonic dialects of the Białystok region]. Wrocław: PAN
Goebl, H. (2000). ‘Langues standards et dialectes locaux dans la France du Sud-Est et l'Italie septentrionale sous le coup de l'effet-frontière: une approche dialectométrique’, IJSL 145: 181–215CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Goeman, A. C. M. and Taeldeman, J. (1996). ‘Fonologie en morfologie van de Nederlandse dialecten. Een nieuwe materiaalverzameling en twee nieuwe atlasprojecten’, Taal en Tongval 48: 38–59Google Scholar
Golato, A. (2000). ‘An innovative German quotative for reporting on embodied action: Und ich so/und er so “and I'm like/and he's like”, Journal of Pragmatics 32 (1): 29–54CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Goldschmidt, T. (2000). ‘Het succes van een blind, passief proces’, NRC Handelsblad, 15 Dec. 35
Goossens, J. (1962). ‘Die gerundeten Palatalvokale im niederländischen Sprachraum’. Zeitschrift für deutsche Mundartforschung ⅩⅪⅩ: 312–328Google Scholar
Goossens, J. (1970), ‘Niederländische Mundarten vom Deutschen aus gesehen’, Niederdeutsches Wort Band 10: 61–80Google Scholar
Goossens, J. (1974). ‘Historische en moderne taalgeografie’. In A. van Loey and J. Goossens, Historische Dialectologie. Amsterdam: K.N.A.W
Goossens, J. (1977). Deutsche Dialektologie. Berlin/New York: Sammlung Göschen, 2205CrossRef
Goossens, J. (1988). ‘Zur Lage des Niederdeutschen und ihrer Erforschung’, Michigan Germanic Studies 12: 1–20Google Scholar
Gordon, E., Campbell, L., Hay, J., Maclagan, M., Sudbury, A., and Trudgill, P. (2004). New Zealand English: Its Origins and Evolution. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Granovetter, M. (1973). ‘The strength of weak ties’, American Journal of Sociology 78: 1360–1380CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Grassi, C. and Pautasso, M. (1989). Prima roba il parlare … Lingue e dialetti dell'emigrazione biellese. Milan: Electa
Grčević, M. (2002). ‘Some remarks on recent lexical changes in the Croatian language’. In R. Lučić (ed.), Lexical Norm and National Language. Lexicography and Language Policy in South-Slavic Languages after 1989. Munich: Sagner, 150–163
Greenberg, R. (2000). ‘Language politics in the Federal Republic of Yugoslavia: the crisis over the future of Serbian’, Slavic Review 59 (3): 625–640CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Gregersen, F. and Pedersen, I. L. (eds.) (1991a). The Copenhagen Study in Urban Sociolinguistics, Vols. 1–2. Copenhagen: C. A. Reitzel
Gregersen, F. and Pedersen, I. L. (1991b). ‘Copenhagen as a speech community’. In K. L. Berge and U.-B. Kotsinas (eds.), Storstadsspråk och storstadskultur i Norden. Stockholm: Meddelanden från Institutionen för nordiska språk vid Stockholms universitet. MINS 34: 57–69
Gregersen, F. and Pedersen, I. L. (2000). ‘A la Recherche du Word order Not Quite. A methodological progress report’. In S. C. Herring, P. van Reenen, and L. Schøsler (eds.), Textual Parameters in Older Languages. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins, 393–431
Grinjowa, N. M. (1990). ‘Interferenzerscheinungen im grammatischen System einer niederdeutschen Mundart in der Sowjetunion infolge intensiver Sprachkontakte’. Unpublished MS
Grootaers, L. (1942). ‘De aangeblazen h in het oosten van het land’. In Verslagen en Mededelingen van de Koninklijke Vlaamse Academie: 217–225
Großkopf, B., Barden, B., and Auer, P. (1996). ‘Dialektanpassung bei sächsischen “Übersiedlern” – Ergebnisse einer Longitudinalstudie’. In N. Boretzky et al. (eds.), Areale, Kontakte, Dialekte. Bochum: Brockmeyer, 139–166
Grundtvig, S. (1872). Dansk Haandordbog. Med den af Kultusministeriet anbefalede Retskrivning. Copenhagen
Guilfoyle, E. (1986). ‘Hiberno-English: a parametric approach’. In J. Harris, D. Little, and D. Singleton (eds.), Perspectives on the English Language in Ireland. Dublin: CLCS, TCD, 121–132
Gumperz, J. J. (1968). ‘The speech community’. In P. P. Grignioli (ed.), Language and Social Context. Harmondsworth: 219–231
Gumperz, J. J. (ed.) (1982). Language and Social Identity. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Gumperz, J. J. (1997). ‘On the interactional bases of speech community membership’. In G. R. Guy, C. Feagin, D. Schiffrin, and J. Baugh (eds.) (1998), Towards a Social Science of Language. Papers in Honor of William Labov. Vol. Ⅱ. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins, 182–203CrossRef
Gumperz, J. J. and Wilson, R. (1971). ‘Convergence and creolization: a case from the Indo-Aryan/Dravidian border’. In D. H. Hymes (ed.), Pidginization and Creolization of Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 151–168
Guy, G. (1974). ‘Variation in the group and the individual: the case of final stop deletion’, Pennsylvania Working Papers on Linguistic Change and Variation 1 (4): 1–75Google Scholar
Guy, G. (1994). ‘The phonology of variation’. In CLS 30: Papers from the 30th Regional Meeting of the Chicago Linguistic Society. Vol. 2: The Parasession on Variation in Linguistic Theory. Chicago: Chicago Linguistic Society, 133–149
Gvozdanović, J. (in press). ‘Slavische Sprachen an der zweiten Jahrtausendwende’. In T. Berger (ed.), Funktionale Studien zur slavistischen Sprachwissenschaft
Haag, K. (1929–30). ‘Sprachwandel im Lichte der Mundartgrenzen’. Theutonista 6 (1): 1–35Google Scholar
Haas, W. (1978). Sprachwandel und Sprachgeographie. Untersuchungen zur Struktur der Dialektverschiedenheit am Beispiele der schweitzerdeutschen Vokalsysteme. Wiesbaden: Steiner
Haberland, H. (1994). ‘Danish’. In E. König and J. van der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London/New York: 313–348
Haegeman, L. (1988). ‘Register variation in English: some theoretical observations’, Journal of English Linguistics 20 (2): 230–248CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Haegeman, L. (1990). ‘Understood subjects in English diaries’, Multilingua 9: 157–199CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Haegeman, L. (ed.) (1997). The New Comparative Syntax. London: Longman
Haeseryn, W. et al. (1997). Algemene Nederlandse Spraakkunst. Second edition. 2 vols. Groningen: Martinus Nijhoff
Hagen, A. (1982). ‘Schuchardts ideeën over dialectvariatie: betekenis en waarderingsgeschiedenis’. In P. van de Craen and R. Willemyns (eds.), Sociolinguistiek en ideologie. Brussels: 233–261
Hägerstrand, T. (1967). Innovation Diffusion as a Spatial Process. Chicago: University of Chicago Press
Hale, K. and Keyser, S. (1993). ‘On argument structure and the lexical expression of syntactic relations’, in K. Hale and S. Keyser (eds.), The View from Building 20. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 53–110
Hale, M. (1994). ‘Review of Lightfoot 1991’, Language 70: 141–152CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Hannan, K. (1996). Borders of Language and Identity in Teschen Silesia. New York: Peter Lang
Harman, Lesley D. (1988). The Modern Stranger. On Language and Membership. Berlin: Mouton de GruyterCrossRef
Harris, J. (1983). ‘The Hiberno-English I've it eaten construction: what is it and where does it come from?’, Teanga 3: 30–43Google Scholar
Harris, J. (1984). ‘English in the north of Ireland’. In P. J. Trudgill (ed.), Language in the British Isles. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 115–134
Harris, J. (1990). ‘Segmental complexity and phonological government’, Phonology 7: 255–300Google Scholar
Harris, J. (1994). English Sound Structure. Oxford: Blackwell
Harris, J. (1996). ‘Syntactic variation and dialect divergence’. In R. Singh (ed.), Towards a Critical Sociolinguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 31–59CrossRef
Harris, J. and Kaye, J. (1990). ‘A tale of two cities: London glottaling and New York City tapping’, The Linguistic Review 7: 251–274CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Harris, J., Little, D. and Singleton, D. (eds.), Perspectives on the English Language in Ireland. Dublin: Centre for Language and Communication Studies, Trinity College Dublin: 67–81
Hartman Keiser, S., Hinskens, F., Migge, B., and Strand, E. (1997). ‘The Northern Cities Shift in the Heartland? A study of radio speech in Columbus, Ohio’. In K. Ainsworth and D. en M. D'Imperio (eds.), Papers From the Linguistics Laboratory. Ohio State University Working Papers in Linguistics 50: 41–68
Haugen, E. (1966/1972). ‘Dialect, language, nation’. In The Ecology of Language. Essays by Einar Haugen. Selected and introduced by A. S. Dil (1972). Stanford: Stanford University Press, 237–254
Haugen, E. (1976). The Scandinavian Languages. London: Faber & Faber
Hay, J. and Sudbury, A. (2002). ‘The fall and rise of /r/: rhoticity and /r/-sandhi in Early New Zealand English. In Selected Papers from NWAV 30, University of Pennsylvania Working Papers in Linguistics 8.3: 281–295
Henriksen, C. C. (1979). ‘Indføring’. In [reprint of] H. Bertelsen (ed.), Danske Grammatikere, Vols. 1–6. Copenhagen: C. A. Reitzel, Vol. 6: 3*–30*
Henry, A. (1992). ‘Infinitives in a for-to dialect’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory 10: 279–301CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Henry, A. (1994). ‘Singular concord in Belfast English’, Belfast Working Papers in Language and Linguistics 12: 134–176Google Scholar
Henry, A. (1995). Belfast English and Standard English: Dialect Variation and Parameter Setting. Oxford: Oxford University Press
Henry, A. (1996). ‘Indirect questions in Belfast English and the analysis of embedded verb-second’, Belfast Working Papers in Language and Linguistics 13: 161–172Google Scholar
Henry, A. (1997a). ‘The syntax of Belfast English’. In J. Kallen (ed.), Focus on Ireland. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 89–108
Henry, A. (1997b). ‘Viewing change in progress: the loss of V2 in Hiberno-English imperatives’. In van Kemenade and Vincent (eds.): 273–296
Henry, P. L. (1958). ‘A linguistic survey of Ireland: preliminary report’, Lochlann 1: 49–208Google Scholar
Hernández-Campoy, J. (2000). ‘Requisitos teórico-metodológicos para el estudio geolinguístico del dialecto murciano’. In J. M. Jiménez Cano (ed.), Estudios sociolinguísticos del dialecto murciano. Murcia: Universidad de Murcia
Herrgen, J. (1986). Koronalisierung und Hyperkorrektion; das palatale Allophon des /CH/-Phonems und seine Variation im Westmitteldeutschen. Wiesbaden: Steiner
Herson Finn, V. (1996). ‘What is “Nash”? Toward a Theory of Ethnolect in the South Slavic Dialect Continuum’. Unpublished Ph.D. diss. Ohio State University
Hewitt, R. (1986). White Talk, Black Talk: Inter-racial Friendship and Communication amongst Adolescents. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Hickey, R. (1999a). ‘Developments and change in Dublin English’. In E. H. Jahr (ed.), Language Change: Advances in Historical Sociolinguistics. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 209–243
Hickey, R. (1999b). ‘Dublin English: current changes and their motivation’. In P. Foulkes and G. J. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 265–281
Hinskens, F. (1986). ‘Primaire en secundaire dialectkenmerken; een onderzoek naar de bruikbaarheid van een vergeten (?) onderscheid’. In J. Creten, G. Geerts, and K. Jaspaert (eds.), Werk-in-uitvoering; momentopname van de sociolingudstiek in België en Nederland. Leuven/Amersfoort: Acco, 135–158
Hinskens, F. (1992). ‘Dialect levelling in Limburg: structural and sociolinguistics aspects.’ Ph.D. thesis, Nijmegen
Hinskens, F. (1993a). ‘Dialect als lingua franca? Dialectgebruik in het algemeen en bij grensoverschrijdend contact in het Nederrijnland en Twente’. In L. Kremer (ed.), Diglossiestudien. Dialekt und Hochsprache im niederländisch-deutschen Grenzland, Landeskundliches Institut Westmünsterland: Vreden, 209–245
Hinskens, F. (1993b). ‘Dialectnivellering en regiolectvorming; bevindingen en beschouwingen’. In F. Hinskens, C. Hoppenbrouwers, and J. Taeldeman (eds.), Dialectverlies en regiolectvorming (= Taal en tongval 46), 40–61
Hinskens, F. (1996). Dialect Levelling in Limburg: Structural and Sociolinguistic Aspects. Linguistische Arbeiten, Tübingen: Niemeyer
Hinskens, F. (1998a). ‘Dialect levelling: a two-dimensional process’, Folia Linguistica 32: 35–51CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Hinskens, F. (1998b). ‘Variation studies in dialectology and three types of sound change’, Sociolinguistica 12: 155–193CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Hinskens, F. (2001). ‘Koineisation and creole genesis. Remarks on Jeff Siegel's contribution’. In N. Smith and T. Veenstra (eds.), Creolisation and Contact. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: Benjamins, 199–218
Hinskens, F., Kallen, J. L., and Taeldeman, J. (2000). ‘Merging and drifting apart. Convergence and divergence of dialects across political borders’. In J. L. Kallen, F. Hinskens, and J. Taeldeman (eds.), International Journal of the Sociology of Language 145: Convergence and Divergence of Dialects across European Borders. Berlin/New York: 1–28
Hinskens, F. and van Hout, R. (1994). ‘Testing theoretical phonological aspects of word-final t-deletion’. In W. Viereck (ed.), Verhandlungen des Internationalen Dialektologenkongresses Bamberg 1990. Band 3, 197–310
Hinskens, F., van Hout, R., and Wetzels, L. (1997). ‘Balancing data and theory in the study of phonological variation and change.’ In F. Hinskens, R. van Hout, and L. Wetzels (eds.), Variation, Change and Phonological Theory. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: Benjamins, 1–33CrossRef
Hock, H. (1991). Principles of Historical Linguistics. 2nd edn. Berlin: Mouton de GruyterCrossRef
Hock, H. H. and Joseph, B. (1996). Language History, Language Change and Language Relationship. An Introduction to Historical and Comparative Linguistics. Berlin/New York: Mouton De Gruyter
Hoekstra, T. (1992). ‘Aspect and theta theory’, in I. M. Roca (ed.), Thematic Structure. Its role in Grammar. Berlin/New York: Foris, 145–174CrossRef
Hoekstra, T. and Roberts, I. (1993). ‘Middles in Dutch and English’. In E. Reuland and W. Abraham (eds.), Knowledge and Language Vol. Ⅱ, Lexical and Conceptual Structure. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic, 185–222
Hofer, L. (2000). ‘Urban dialects in Basel, Switzerland: variation, change and attitudes’. In J. Fontana, L. McNally, M. Turell, and E. Vallduví (eds.), ICLaVE 1. Proceedings of the first International Conference on Language Variation in Europe. Barcelona: Universitat Pompeu Fabra, 101–109
Hoffman, S. (2002). ‘Are low-frequency complex prepositions grammaticalised? On the limits of corpus data – and the importance of intuitions’
Hofmann, E. (1963). ‘Sprachsoziologische Untersuchungen über den Einfluß der Stadtsprache auf Mundartsprechende Arbeiter’, Marburger Universitätsbund. Jahrbuch 1963. Marburg: 201–281
Hogg, M. A. and Abrams, D. (1988). Social Identifications. A Social Psychology of Intergroup Relations and Group Processes. London/New York: Routledge
Holmberg, A. (1986). Word Order and Syntactic Features in the Scandinavian Languages and in English. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, Stockholm University
Holmes, J. (1994). ‘New Zealand flappers: an analysis of t voicing in New Zealand English’, English World-Wide 15: 195–224CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Holmes, J. (1992). An Introduction to Sociolinguistics. London/New York: Longman
Holmes, J. (1995a). Women, Men and Politeness. Harlow: Longman
Holmes, J. (1995b). ‘Glottal stops in New Zealand English: an analysis of variants of word-final /t/’, Linguistics 33: 433–463CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Holmquist, J. C. (1988). Language Loyalty and Linguistic Variation. A Study in Spanish Cantabria. Dordrecht/Providence: Foris
Hoppenbrouwers, C. (1990). Het regiolect: van dialect tot Algemeen Nederlands. Muiderberg: Coutinho
Hopper, P, and Traugott, E. C. (1993). Grammaticalization. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Hornung, M. (1994). ‘Die sogenannten zimbrischen Mundarten der Sieben und Dreizehn Gemeinden in Oberitalien’. In M. Hornung (ed.), Die deutschen Sprachinseln in den Südalpen: Mundarten und Volkstum. Hildesheim, Zürich, New York. (Studien zur Dialektologie, 3): 19–43
Horvath, B. M. (1985). Variation in Australian English: The Sociolects of Sydney. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Horvath, B. and Horvath, R. (2001). ‘A multilocality study of a sound change in process: the case of /l/ vocalisation in New Zealand and Australian English’, Language Variation and Change 13 (1): 37–57CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Hostrup, C. (1889). Komedier, Vols. 1–3. Copenhagen: Gyldendal
Høysgaard, J. P. (1920) (1747). ‘Accentuered og Raisonnered Grammatica’. In H. Bertelsen (ed.), Danske Grammatikere, Vol. 4. Copenhagen: Gyldendal
Hudson, R. A. (1984). Word Grammar. Oxford: Blackwell
Hudson, R. A. (1985). ‘A psychological and socially plausible theory of language structure’. In D. Schiffrin (ed.), Meaning, Form and Use in Context: Linguistic Applications. Georgetown: Georgetown University Press, 150–159
Hudson, R. A. (1986). ‘Sociolinguistics and the theory of grammar’, Linguistics 24: 1053–1078CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Hudson, R. A. (1990). English Word Grammar. Oxford: Blackwell
Hudson, R. A. (1995). ‘Syntax and sociolinguistics’. In J. Jacobs, A. von Stechow, W. Sternefeld, and T. Vennemann (eds.), Syntax: An International Handbook, Vol. Ⅱ. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter, 1514–1528
Hudson, R. A. (1996). Sociolinguistics. 2nd edn. Cambridge: Cambridge University PressCrossRef
Hudson, R. A. (1997a). ‘Inherent variability and linguistic theory’, Cognitive Linguistics 8: 73–108CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Hudson, R. A. (1997b). ‘The rise of auxiliary DO: verb-non-raising or category-strengthening’, Transactions of the Philological Society 95: 41–72CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Huffines, M. (1989). ‘Case usage among the Pennsylvania German sectarians and nonsectarians’. In N. Dorian (ed.), Investigating Obsolescence. Studies in Language Contraction and Death. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 211–226CrossRef
Huffines, M. (1994). ‘Directionality of language influence: the case of Pennsylvania German and English’. In N. Berend and K. J. Mattheier (eds.), Sprachinselforschung. Eine Gedenkschrift für Hugo Jedig. Frankfurt am Main: 47–58
Hughes, G. A. and Trudgill, P. (1995). English Accents and Dialects. 3rd edn. London: Arnold
Hulk, A. and Cornips, L. (2000). ‘Reflexives in middles and the syntax-semantics interface’. In H. Bennis and M. Everaert (eds.), Interface Strategies. KNAW-series. Amsterdam: Elsevier, 207–222
Hume, [ A.]. (1877–78). ‘Remarks on the Irish dialect of the English language’, Transactions of the Historic Society of Lancashire and Cheshire. 3rd ser., 6: 93–140Google Scholar
Hunnius, K. (1990). ‘Französische Flexionslehre’. In Lexikon der Romanistischen Linguistik (LRL). Hrsgg. v./Edité par Günter Holtus, Michael Metzeltin, Christian Schmitt. Bd./Volume Ⅴ, 1: Französisch. Le français. Tübingen: 59–71
Hutterer, C. J. (1975). Die germanischen Sprachen. Ihre Geschichte in Grundzügen. 2. Aufl. 1987. Budapest
Hutterer, C. J. (1982). ‘Sprachinselforschung als Prüfstand für dialektologische Arbeitsprinzipien’. In W. Besch, U. Knoop, W. Putschke, and H. E. Wiegand (eds.), Dialektologie. Ein Handbuch zur deutschen und allgemeinen Dialektforschung. Halbbd. 2. Berlin/ New York
Hyams, N. (1986). Language Acquisition and the Theory of Parameters. Dordrecht: Reidel
Hyams, N. and Wexler, K. (1993). ‘On the grammatical basis of null subjects in child language’, Linguistic Inquiry 24: 421–459Google Scholar
Hyman, L. M. (1975). Phonology: Theory and Analysis. London: Holt, Rinehart & Winston
Hymes, Dell (1971). ‘Introduction to section Ⅲ’. In D. Hymes (ed.), Pidginisation and Creolisation of Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 65–90
Ihalainen, O. (1991). ‘Periphrastic do in affirmative sentences in the dialect of East Somerset’, in Trudgill and Chambers (eds.): 148–160
Itogi (2000). Itogi perepisi naselenija Respubliki Belarus [Results of the Population Census of the Republic of Belarus]. Minsk: Gosudarstvennyj komitet statistiki Respubliki Belarus’
Ivars, A. M. (1998). ‘Urban colloquial Swedish in Finland’. In P. Auer (ed.), Dialect levelling and the standard varieties in Europe. Folia Linguistica: 32, 1/2, 101–114CrossRef
Jacobsen, H. G. (1973). Sprogrøgt i Danmark i 1930rne og 1940rne. Copenhagen: Gyldendal
Jacobson, S. (1985). ‘Synonymy and hyponymy in syntactic variation’, Papers from the Third Scandinavian Symposium on Syntactic Variation, 7–17
Jacobson, S. (1989). ‘Some approaches to syntactic variation’. In Fasold and Schiffrin (eds.): 381–394CrossRef
Jaeggli, O. (1986). ‘Passive’. Linguistic Inquiry 17: 587–622Google Scholar
Jaeggli, O. and Safir, K. (eds.) (1989). The Null Subject Parameter. Dordrecht: Kluwer
Jahr, E. H. (1988). ‘Social dialect influence in language change: the halting of a sound change in Oslo Norwegian’. In J. Fisiak (ed.), Historical Dialectology: Regional and Social. Berlin/New York/Amsterdam, Mouton de Gruyter: 329–335CrossRef
Jahr, E. H. (1996). Nynorsk språkforskning – en historisk oversikt, in C. Henriksen et al. (eds.), Studies in the Development of Linguistics in Denmark, Finland, Iceland, Norway and Sweden. Oslo: Novus, 84–101
Janich, N. and Greule, A. (eds.) (2002). Sprachkulturen in Europa. Tübingen: Narr
Jaspaert, K. (1986). ‘Statuut en structuur van standaardtalig Vlaanderen’. Ph.D. thesis, University of Leuven
Jaspaert, K. and Kroon S. (1988). ‘The relationship between language attitudes and language choice’. In R. van Hout and U. Knops (eds.), Language Attitudes in the Dutch Language Area. Dordrecht: Foris, 157–171CrossRef
Jedig, H. H. (1966). Laut-und Formenbestand der niederdeutschen Mundart des Altai-Gebietes. (Sitzungsberichte der Sächsischen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Leipzig. Philologisch-historische Klasse, 112/5.) Berlin
Jones, E. and Eyles, J. (1977). An Introduction to Social Geography. Oxford: Oxford University Press
Jørgensen, J. N. (1980). Det flade a vil sejre. Skrifter om anvendt og matematisk lingvistik 7. Copenhagen: Institut for anvendt og matematisk lingvistik, 67–124
Jørgensen, J. N. and Kristensen, K. (1994). Moderne sjællandsk. En undersøgelse af unge sjællænderes talesprog. Copenhagen: C. A. Reitzels Forlag
Jørgensen, J. N. and Kristensen, K. (1995). ‘On boundaries in linguistic continua’. Language Variation and Change 7: 153–168CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Joseph, J. E. (1987). Eloquence and Power. The Rise of Language Standards and Standard Languages. London: Frances Pinter
Kachru, B. B. (1983). The Indianization of English. The English Language in India. Delhi: Oxford University Press
Kaeding, F. W. (1897). Häufigkeitswörterbuch der deutschen Sprache. Festgestellt durch einen Arbeitsausschuss der deutschen Stenographie-Systeme. In 15 Lieferungen. Steglitz bei Berlin
Kahn, D. (1976). ‘Syllable-based Generalizations in English Phonology’. Dissertation, MIT
Kaisse, E. M. (1993). ‘Rule reordering and rule generalization in Lexical Phonology: a reconsideration’. In S. Hargus and E. M. Kaisse (eds.), Studies in Lexical Phonology, Phonetics and Phonology, 4. London: Academic Press, 343–363CrossRef
Kaisse, E. M. and Shaw, P. A. (1985). ‘On the theory of Lexical Phonology’, Phonology Yearbook 2: 1–30CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kallen, J. (1991). ‘Sociolinguistic variation and methodology: after as a Dublin variable’. In J. Cheshire (ed.), English Around the World: Sociolinguistic Perspectives. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 61–74CrossRef
Kallen, J. (1994). ‘English in Ireland’. In R. Burchfield (ed.), The Cambridge History of the English Language, Vol. 5. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 148–196CrossRef
Kallen, J. (ed.) (1997a). Focus on Ireland, Varieties of English around the World, G21. Amsterdam: Benjamins
Kallen, J. (1997b). ‘Irish English: context and contacts’. In J. Kallen (ed.), Focus on Ireland. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 1–33
Kallen, J. (2000). ‘Two languages, two borders, one island: some linguistic and political borders in Ireland. International Journal of the Sociology of Language 145: 29–63CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kallen, J. and Kirk, J. (2001). ‘Convergence and divergence in the verb phrase in Irish Standard English’. In J. Kirk, and D. ÓBaoill (eds.), Language Links: The Languages of Scotland and Ulster. Belfast: Cló Ollscoil na Banríona, 59–79
Kaschuba, W. (1990). ‘German Bürgerlichkeit after 1880. Culture as a symbolic practice. In B. Stråth (ed.), Language and the Construction of Class Identities. Gothenburg: Gothenburg University, 223–252
Katsoyannou, M. and Karyolemou, M. (1998). ‘Structural similarities of unrelated dialects: Calabrese and Greco in contact’. Paper presented at the conference on the ‘Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe’, Reading, 17–19 September
Kaufmann, G. (1997). Varietätendynamik in Sprachkontaktsituationen. Attitüden und Sprachverhalten rußlanddeutscher Mennoniten in Mexiko und den USA. (VarioLingua, 3) Frankfurt am Main
Kayne, R. (1989a). ‘Null subjects and clitic climbing’. In Jaeggli and Safir (eds.): 239–261
Kayne, R. (1989b). ‘Facets of Romance past participle agreement’. In Benincà (ed.): 85–104
Kayne, R. (1994). The Antisymmetry of Syntax. Cambridge, Mass: MIT Press
Keel, W. D. (1994). ‘Reduction and loss of case marking in the noun phrase in German-American language islands: internal development or external interference?’ In N. Berend and K. J. Mattheier (eds.), Sprachinselforschung. Eine Gedenkschrift für Hugo Jedig. Frankfurt am Main: 93–104
Keene, D. (2000). ‘Metropolitan values: migration, mobility and cultural norms, London 1100–1700’. In L. Wright (ed.), The Development of Standard English 1300–1800. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press: 93–116CrossRef
Keller, R. (1994). Sprachwandel. Von der unsichtbaren Hand in der Sprache. Tübingen: Francke/UTB
Kemmer, S. and Barlow, M. (2000). ‘Introduction: a usage-base conception of language’. In M. Barlow and S. Kemmer (eds.), Usage-based Models of Language. Stanford: CSLI Publications, ⅶ–ⅹⅹⅷCrossRef
Kenstowicz, M. (1994). Phonology in Generative Grammar. Oxford: Blackwell
Kerswill, P. E. (1994a). Dialects Converging: Rural Speech in Urban Norway. Oxford: Clarendon
Kerswill, P. E. (1994b). ‘A new dialect in a new city: children's and adult's speech in Milton Keynes’. Final Report. Project founded by the Economic and Social Research Council (1990–1994 R000232376). Reading
Kerswill, P. E. (1996a), ‘Divergence and convergence of sociolinguistic structures in Norway and England’. In P. Auer, F. Hinskens, and K. Mattheier (eds.), Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in Europe (Sociolinguistica 10), 90–104
Kerswill, P. E. (1996b). ‘Children, adults and language change’, Language Variation and Change 8: 177–202CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kerswill, P. E. (2001). ‘Mobility, meritocracy and dialect levelling: the fading (and phasing) out of Received Pronunciation’. In P. Rajame (ed.), British Studies in the New Millennium: Challenge of the Grassroots. Proceedings of the 3rd Tartu Conference on British Studies, University of Tartu, Estonia, August 2000. Also at http://www.universalteacher.org.uk/lang/rp.htm
Kerswill, P. E. (2002a). ‘Koineization and accommodation’. In J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill, N. Schilling-Estes (eds.), The Handbook of Language Variation and Change. Oxford: Blackwell, 669–702
Kerswill, P. E. (2002b). ‘Models of linguistic change and diffusion: new evidence from dialect levelling in British English’. In S. Varlokosta and M. Georgiafentis (eds.), Reading Working Papers in Linguistics 6: 187–216
Kerswill, P. E. (2002c). ‘A dialect with “great inner strength”? The perception of nativeness in the Bergen speech community’. In D. Long and D. Preston (eds.), A Handbook of Perceptual Dialectology, Vol. 2, Amsterdam: Benjamins, 153–173
Kerswill, P. E. (2003). ‘Dialect levelling and geographical diffusion in British English’. In D. Britain and J. Cheshire (eds.), Social Dialectology. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 223–243CrossRef
Kerswill, P. E. (2004). ‘Social dialectology’. In U. Ammon, N. Dittmar, K. Mattheier and P. Trudgill (eds.), Sociolinguistics/Soziolinguistik. An International Handbook of the Science of Language and Society. 2nd edn. Vol. Ⅰ, Berlin: de Gruyter, 22–33
Kerswill, P. E. (2005). ‘Migration and language’. In U. Ammon, K. Mattheier, and P. Trudgill (eds.), Handbook of Sociolinguistics, 2nd edn., Vol. 2. Berlin: de Gruyter
Kerswill, P. E. and Williams, A. (1997). ‘Investigating social and linguistic identity in three British schools’. In U-B Kotsinas, A-B Stenström, and A.-M. Malin (eds.), Ungdomsspråk I Norden. Föredrag från ett forskarsymposium [Youth Language in the Nordic countries: Papers from a research symposium]. Series: MINS, No. 43. Stockholm: University of Stockholm, Department of Nordic Languages and Literature, 159–176
Kerswill, P. E. and Williams, A. (1999). ‘Mobility versus social class in dialect levelling: evidence from new and old towns in England’, Cuadernos de Filologia Inglesa 8: 47–57Google Scholar
Kerswill, P. E. and Williams, A. (2000). ‘Creating a new town koine: children and language change in Milton Keynes’, Language in Society 29(1): 65–115CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kerswill, P. E. and Williams, A. (2002a). ‘“Salience” as an explanatory factor in language change: evidence from dialect levelling in urban England’. In M. C. Jones and E. Esch (eds.), Contact-induced Language Change. An Examination of Internal, External and Non-linguistic Factors. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 81–110
Kerswill, P. E. and Williams, A. (2002b). ‘Dialect recognition and speech community focusing in new and old towns in England: the effects of dialect levelling, demography and social networks’. In D. Long and D. Preston (eds.), A Handbook of Perceptual Dialectology, Vol. 2. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 175–206
Kerswill, P. E. and Williams, A. (2005). ‘New towns and koinéisation: linguistic and social correlates’, Linguistics 43 (5)CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Keyser, S. J. and Roeper, T. (1984). ‘On the middle and ergative constructions in English’, Linguistic Inquiry 15: 381–416Google Scholar
Kikai, A., Schleppegrell, M., and Tagliamonte, S. (1987). ‘The influence of syntactic position on relativization strategies’. In Denning et al. (eds.): 266–277
King, R. D. (1969). Historical Linguistics and Generative Grammar. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall
King, R. and Nadasdi, T. (1996). ‘Sorting out morphosyntactic variation in Acadian French: the importance of the linguistic marketplace’. In Arnold et al. (eds.), 113–128
Kingsmore, R. K. (1995). Ulster Scots Speech: A Sociolinguistic Study. Tuscaloosa: University of Alabama Press
Kiparsky, P. (1968). ‘Linguistic universals and linguistic change’. In E. Bach and R. Harms (eds.), Universals in Linguistic Theory. New York: Holt, 170–202
Kiparsky, P. (1972). ‘Explanation in phonology’. In S. Peters (ed.), Goals of Linguistic Theory. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall, 189–227
Kiparsky, P. (1985). ‘Some consequences of Lexical Phonology’, Phonology Yearbook 2: 85–138CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kiparsky, P. (1992). ‘Analogy’, in W. Bright (ed.), International Encyclopedia of Linguistics. vol. 1. New York: Oxford University Press, 56–61
Kiparsky, P. (1995). ‘The phonological basis of sound change’. In J. Goldsmith (ed.), The Handbook of Phonological Theory. Oxford: Blackwell, 640–670
Kirchner, R. (2000). ‘Geminate inalterability and lenition’, Language 76: 509–545CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kirchner, R. (2001). An Effort Based Approach to Consonant Lenition. London: Routledge
Klausmann, H. (2000). ‘Changes of dialect, code-switching, and new winds of usage: the divergence of dialects along the border between Germany and France in and around the region of the Oberrhein’. In J. Kallen, F. Hinskens, and J. Taeldeman (eds.), 109–130
Klemola, J. (1997). ‘A note on the use of data from non-standard varieties of English in linguistic argumentation’. In R. Hickey and S. Puppel (eds.), Language History, and Linguistic Modelling: Festschrift für Jacek Fisiak. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. 959–967
Kloeke, G. (1927). De Hollandsche expansie in de zestiende en zeventiende eeuw en haar weerspiegeling in de hedendaagsche Nederlandsche dialecten. Proeve eener historisch-dialect-geografische synthese. s-Gravenhage: Nijhoff
Kloss, H. 1967, ‘“Abstand languages” and “Ausbau languages”’, Anthropological linguistics 9 (7), 29–41Google Scholar
Kloss, H. (1980). ‘Deutsche Sprache außerhalb des geschlossenen deutschen Sprachgebiets’. In H. P. Althaus, H. Henne, and H. E. Wiegand (eds.), Lexikon der germanistischen Linguistik. Tübingen: 537–546CrossRef
Knoke, D. and Kuklinski, J. H. (1982). Network Analysis. Beverly Hills, Calif.: Sage
Knowles, G. (1973). Scouse: The Urban Dialect of Liverpool. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, University of Leeds
Kocka, J. (1993). ‘The European pattern and the German case’. In J. Kocka and M. Allen (eds.), Bourgeois Society in Nineteenth-Century Europe. Oxford: Berg, 3–39
Koerner, K. (1989). ‘Toward a history of modern sociolinguistics’. American Speech 66 (1): 57–70CrossRefGoogle Scholar
König, E. and van der Auwera, J. (eds.) (1994). The Germanic Languages. London, New York
König, W. (2001), dtv-Atlas Deutsche Sprache. Munich: Deutscher Taschenbuch Verlag
Koster, J. and May, R. (1982). ‘On the constituency of infinitives’, Language 58: 116–143CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kotsinas, U-B. (1988a). ‘Immigrant children's Swedish – a new variety?’, Journal of Multilingual and Multicultural Development 9, (1/2): 129–140CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kotsinas, U-B. (1988b). ‘Stockholmsspråk i förändring’. In G. Petterson (ed.), Studier i svensk språkhistoria. Lundastudier i nordisk språkvetenskap. Lund: Lund University Press, 133–147
Kotsinas, U-B. (1994). Ungdomsspråk. Uppsala: Hallgren and Fallgren
Kremer, L. (1979). Grenzmundarten und Mundartgrenzen. Köln: Böhlau Verlag
Kremer, L. and Niebaum, H. (eds.) (1990a). Grenzdialekte. Studien zur Entwicklung kontinentalwestgermanischer Dialektkontinua (Germanistische Linguistik 101–103)
Kremer, L. and Niebaum, H. (1990b). Zur Einführung: Grenzdialekte als Gradmesser des Sprachwandels. In Kremer and Niebaum (eds.)
Kristensen, K. (2003). ‘Standard Danish, Copenhagen Sociolects, and regional varieties in the 1900s’. International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 159: 29–44Google Scholar
Kristensen, K. and Thelander, M. (1984). ‘On dialect levelling in Denmark and Sweden’, Folia linguistica 18: 223–246CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kristiansen, T. (1990). Udtalenormering i skolen. Copenhagen: Gyldendal
Kristiansen, T. (1991). ‘Sproglige normidealer på Næstvedegnen. Kvantitative sprogholdningsstudier’. Ph.D. diss., University of Copenhagen
Kristiansen, T. (1996). ‘Det gode sprogsamfund: det norske eksempel’, Nydanske Studier og almen kommunikationsteori 21: 9–22Google Scholar
Kristiansen, T. (1997). ‘Language attitudes in a Danish cinema’. In N. Coupland and A. Jaworski (eds.), Sociolinguistics. A Reader and Coursebook. London: Macmillan, 291–305CrossRef
Kristiansen, T. (1998). ‘The role of standard ideology in the disappearance of the traditional Danish dialects’. Folia Linguistica 32 (1–2): 115–129CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kristiansen, T. (2001). ‘Two standards: one for the media and one for the school’, Language Awareness 10(1): 9–24CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kristiansen, T. (2003). ‘The youth and the gatekeepers: reproduction and change in language norm and variation’. In A. Georgakopoulou and J. K. Androutsopoulos (eds.), Discourse Constructions of Youth Identities. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 279–302CrossRef
Kristiansen, T. (2004). ‘Social meaning and norm-ideals for speech in a Danish community’. In A Jaworski, N. Coupland, and D. Galasinski (eds.), Metalanguage. Social and Ideological Perspectives. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 167–192CrossRef
Kristiansen, V. (1866). Bidrag til en Ordbog over Gadesproget og saakaldt daglig Tale. Copenhagen: H. Hagerup
Kroch, A. S. (1978). ‘Toward a theory of social dialect variation’, Language in Society 7: 17–36CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kroch, A. S. (1980). ‘Resumptive pronouns in English relative clauses’. Paper presented at the LSA Annual Meeting, San Antonio
Kroch, A. S. (1989). ‘Reflexes of grammar in patterns of language change’, Language Variation and Change 1: 199–244CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Kroch, A. S. (1994). ‘Morphosyntactic variation’. In Beals et al.(eds.): 180–201
Kroch, A. S. (2001). ‘Syntactic change’. In M. Baltin and C. Collins (eds.), The Handbook of Contemporary Syntactic Theory. Malden: Blackwell, 699–729CrossRef
Kroch, A. S. and Small, C. (1978). ‘Grammatical ideology and its effect on speech’. In D. Sankoff (ed.), Linguistic Variation: Models and Methods, New York: Academic Press, 45–55
Kroch, A. S. and Taylor, A. (1994). ‘The Loss of OV Word Order in Middle English’. Unpublished MS, University of Pennsylvania
Krug, M. G. (2000). Emerging English modals: A Corpus-based Study of Grammaticalization. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter
Kruijsen, J. (1995). ‘Geografische patronen in taalcontact. Romaans leengoed in de Limburgse dialecten van Haspengouw’. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, University of Nijmegen
Kuhn, W. (1934). Deutsche Sprachinsel-Forschung. Geschichte, Aufgaben, Verfahren. Plauen i. Vogtl. (Ostdeutsche Forschungen, 2)
Labelle, M. (1992). ‘Change of state and valency’, Journal of Linguistics 28: 375–414CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Labov, W. (1963). ‘The social motivation of a sound change’, Word 19: 273–309CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Labov, W. (1966). The Social Stratification of English in New York City. Washington, DC: Center for Applied Linguistics
Labov, W. (1969). ‘Contraction, deletion and inherent variability of the English copula’, Language 45: 715–762CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Labov, W. (1972a). Sociolinguistic Patterns. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press
Labov, W. (1972b). Language in the Inner City: Studies in the Black English Vernacular. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press
Labov, W. (1972c). ‘The study of language in its social context’. In W. Labov, Sociolinguistic Patterns. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 183–259
Labov, W. (1972d). ‘Negative attraction and negative concord in English grammar’, Language 48: 773–818CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Labov, W. (1973). ‘The social setting of linguistic change’. In T. A. Sebeok (ed.), Current Trends in Linguistics, Vol. 11, 195–251
Labov, W. (1974). ‘Language change as a form of communication’. In A. Silverstein (ed.), Human Communcation. Hillsdale: Erlbaum, NJ, 221–256
Labov, W. (1975). What is a Linguistic Fact? Lisse: Peter de Ridder Press
Labov, W. (1978). ‘Where does the sociolinguistic variable stop? A reply to B. Lavandera’, Texas Working Papers in Sociolinguistics, 44. Austin: SW Educational Development Laboratory
Labov, W. (1981). ‘Resolving the Neogrammarian controversy’, Language 57: 267–308CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Labov, W. (1984). ‘Field methods of the project on linguistic change and variation’. In J. Baugh and J. Sherzer (eds.), Language in Use. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 28–53
Labov, W. (1989). ‘The child as linguistic historian’, Language Variation and Change 1: 85–94CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Labov, W. (1990). ‘The intersection of sex and social class in the course of linguistic change’. In Language Variation and Change 2, 205–254CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Labov, W. (1991). ‘The boundaries of a grammar: inter-dialectal reactions to positive any more’, in Trudgill and Chambers (eds.): 273–288
Labov, W. (1994). Principles of Linguistic Change, Vol. 1: Internal Factors. Oxford: Blackwell
Labov, W. (1996). ‘When intuitions fail’, Papers from the 32nd Regional Meeting of the Chicago Linguistics Society, 32: 76–106Google Scholar
Labov, W. (1997). ‘Resyllabification’. In F. Hinskens, R. van Hout, and W. L. Wetzels (eds.), Variation, Change and Phonological Theory. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 145–179CrossRef
Labov, W. (2001). Principles of Linguistic Change, Vol. 2: Social Factors. Blackwell: Oxford
Labov, W., Cohen, P., Robins, C., and Lewis, J. (1968). A Study of the Non-standard English of Negro and Puerto-Rican Speakers in New York City. Co-operative Research Report 3288, Vols. Ⅰ and Ⅱ, Philadelphia: US Regional Survey
Labov, W. and Harris, W. (1986). ‘The facto segregation of Black and White vernaculars’. In D. Sankoff (ed.), Diversity and Diachrony. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins, 1–24CrossRef
Landa, A. and Franco, J. (1996). ‘Two issues in null objects in Basque Spanish: morphological decoding and grammatical permeability’. In K. Zagona (ed.), Grammatical Theory and Romance Languages, Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 159–168CrossRef
Landa, A. and Franco, J. (1998). ‘Dialect divergence in Spain and the syntactic stronghold of Basque Spanish’. Paper presented at the ESF conference ‘The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe’, 17–19 September, University of Reading
Lang, E. (1996). ‘Das Deutsche im typologischen Spektrum. Einführung in den Band’. In Deutsch – typologisch. Hrsgg. v. Ewald Lang and Gisela Zifonun. (Institut für deutsche Sprache. Jahrbuch 1995.) Berlin/New York: 7–15
Langacker, R. (1990). Concept, Image and Symbol: The Cognitive Basis of Grammar. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter
Langacker, R. (1994). ‘Cognitive grammar’. In R. Asher (ed.), Encyclopaedia of Language and Linguistics. Oxford: Pergamon Press, 590–593
Lanthaler, F. (1997). ‘Deutsche Varietäten in Südtirol’. In G. Stickel (ed.), Varietäten des Deutschen. Regional-und Umgangssprachen. Berlin: De Gruyter, 364–383
Lass, R. (1980). On Explaining Language Change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Lass, R. and Anderson, J. M. (1975). Old English Phonology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Lausberg, H. (1962). Romanische Sprachwissenschaft, Vol. Ⅲ: Formenlehre. Zweiter Teil. Berlin
Lavandera, B. (1978). ‘Where does the sociolinguistic variable stop?’, Language in Society 7: 171–183CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Lavandera, B. (1984). Variación y Significado. Buenos Aires: Hachette
Le Page, R. (1997). ‘The evolution of a sociolinguistic theory of language’. In F. Coulmas (ed.): 15–32
Page, R. (1980). ‘Projection, focusing, diffusion, or, steps towards a sociolinguistic theory of language, illustrated from the Sociolinguistic Survey of Multilingual Communities, Stages I: Cayo District, Belize (formerly British Honduras), and Ⅱ: St Lucia. York Papers in Linguistics 9: 9–32Google Scholar
Le Page, R. B. and Tabouret-Keller, A. (1985). Acts of Identity: Creole-based Approaches to Language and Ethnicity. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Leahy, D. J. (1915). ‘A Study of English, as Spoken in Cork City’. Unpublished M.A. thesis, University College Cork
Lefèbvre C. (1989). ‘Some problems in defining syntactic variables: the case of WH- questions in Montreal French’. In Fasold and Schiffrin (eds.): 351–366CrossRef
Lemieux, M. (1987). ‘Clitic placement in the history of French’. In Denning et al. (eds.): 278–299
Levelt, W., and Kelter, S. (1982). ‘Surface form and memory in question answering’, Cognitive Psychology 14: 78–106CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Levin, I. (1844). Dansk Lydlære og Dansk Kjønslære. Copenhagen: Samfundet til dansk Literaturs Fremme
Levinson, S. (1988). ‘Conceptual problems in the study of regional and cultural style’. In N. Dittmar and P. Schlobinski (eds.), The Sociolinguistics of Urban Vernaculars. Berlin: de Gruyter, 161–190
Lightfoot, D. W. (1979). Principles of Diachronic Syntax. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Lightfoot, D. W. (1988). ‘Creoles, triggers and universal grammar’. In C. Duncan-Rose and T. Vennemann (eds.), Rhetorica, Pragmatica, Syntactica: A Festschrift for R. P. Stockwell. New York: Routledge, 97–106
Lightfoot, D. W. (1989). ‘The child's trigger experience: degree-0 learnability’, Behavioral and Brain Sciences 12(2): 321–334CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Lightfoot, D. W. (1991). How to Set Parameters: Arguments from Language Change. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press
Lightfoot, D. W. (1996). Language Acquisition and Language Change. Oxford: Blackwell
Lightfoot, D. W. (1999). The Development of Language: Acquisition, Change and Evolution. Oxford: Blackwell
Lightfoot, D. W. and Hornstein, N. (eds.) (1994). Verb Movement. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Lilja, S. (1995). ‘Stockholms befolkningsutveckling före 1800’, Historisk Tidskrift 3: 304–337Google Scholar
Lilja, S. (1996). ‘Stockholm under huvudstädernas sekler. Stockholms befolkningsutveckling i jämförande perspektiv’, Historisk Tidskrift 3: 339–361
Linke, A. (1991). ‘Zum Sprachgebrauch des Bürgertums in 19. Jh’. In R. Wimmer (ed.), Das 19. Jahrhundert. Sprachgeschichtliche Wurzeln des heutigen Deutsch (Ids-Jahrbuch 1990). Berlin/New York: de Gruyter, 250–281
Lippi-Green, R. L. (1989). ‘Social network integration and language change in progress in a rural alpine village’, Language in Society 18: 213–234CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Løkensgard Hoel, O. (1996). Nasjonalisme i norsk målstrid 1848–1865. KULT skriftserie nr. 51. Oslo: Norges forskningsråd
Louden, M. L. (1994). ‘Syntactic change in multilingual language islands’. In N. Berend and K. J. Mattheier, Klaus, J. (eds.), Sprachinselforschung. Eine Gedenkschrift für Hugo Jedig. Frankfurt am Main: 73–91
Lumtzer, V. (1894). Die Leibitzer Mundart. Halle/J. (= H. Paul and W. Braune (eds.) Beiträge zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache und Literatur, 18)
Lund, J. (1996). ‘Guldalderens lyd. Om diktion og hverdagssprog’. In Scaverius, B. (ed.), Guldalderens verden. Copenhagen: Gyldendal: 177–183
Lundén, T. (1973). ‘Interaction across an “open” international boundary: Norway–Sweden’. In Strassoldo, R. (ed.) (1973). Contini e regiono. Trieste: Edizioni LINT. 147–161
Macaulay, R. K. S. (1991). Locating Dialect in Discourse: The Language of Honest Men and Bonnie Lasses in Ayr. New York: Oxford University Press
Macaulay, R. K. S. (2001). ‘You're like “why not?” The quotative expressions of Glasgow adolescents’, Journal of Sociolinguistics 5(1): 3–21CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Macaulay, R. K. S. (2002a). ‘Discourse variation’. In J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill, and N. Schilling-Estes (eds.), Handbook of Language Variation and Change. Malden, Mass., and Oxford: Blackwell, 283–305
Macaulay, R. K. S. (2002b). ‘Extremely interesting, very interesting, or only quite interesting? Adverbs and social class’, Journal of Sociolinguistics 6: 398–417CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Mackey, W. F. (1988). ‘Geolinguistics: its scope and principles’. In C. H. Williams (ed.), Language in Geographic Context. Clevedon: Multilingual Matters, 20–45
MacMahon, M. K. C. (1998). ‘Phonology’. In S. Romaine (ed.), The Cambridge History of the English Language, Vol. 4. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 373–535
Mæhlum, B. (1992). ‘Dialect socialization in Longyearbyen, Svalbard (Spitsbergen): a fruitful chaos’. In E. H. Jahr (ed.), Language Contact and Language Change. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 117–130CrossRef
Mæhlum, B. (1996). ‘Code-switching in Hemnesberget – myth or reality?’, Journal of Pragmatics 25: 749–761CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Mæhlum, B. (1997). Dølamål: dialektene i Bardu og Målselv. Målselv: Målselv Mållag
Mæhlum, B. (2003). ‘Normer’. In Mæhlum et al. (eds.): Språkmøte. Innføring i sosiolingvistikk. Oslo: Cappelen Akademisk Forlag, 86–102
Mæhlum, B. (in press). ‘Sociolinguistic structures chronologically Ⅲ: Norwegian’. In The Nordic Languages. An International Handbook of the History of the North Germanic Language. Vol. 2. Berlin: de Gruyter
Magner, T. (1992). ‘Urban vernaculars and the standard language in Yugoslavia’. In R. Bugarski and C. Hawkesworth (eds.), Language Planning in Yugoslavia. Columbus, Oh.: Slavica Publishers, 189–199
Mak, G. (1998). Hoe God verdween uit Jorwerd. Een Nederlands dorp in de twintigste eeuw. Amsterdam/Antwerp: Atlas
Marcato, G., Ursini, F., and Politi, A. (1974). Dialetto e italiano. Status socioeconomico e percezione sociale del fenomeno linguistico. Pisa: Pacini
Marshall, J. (2004). Language Change and Sociolinguistics. Rethinking Social Networks. Basingstoke: Palgrave MacmillanCrossRef
Maschler, Y. (2002). ‘On the grammaticalization of ke'ilu “like”, lit. “as if”, in Hebrew talk-in-interaction’, Language in Society 31: 243–276CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Matras, Y. (2001). ‘Identifying and explaining convergent processes’, talk delivered at the 23rd Annual Meeting of the German Linguistics Society (DGfS), Leipzig, 28 February–1 March
Mattheier, K. (1980). Pragmatik und Soziologie der Dialekte; Einführung in die kommunikative Dialektologie des Deutschen. Heidelberg
Mattheier, K. (1991). ‘Standardsprache als Sozialsymbol’. In R. Wimmer (Hrg.) Das 19. Jahrhundert. Sprachgeschichtliche Wurzeln des heutigen Deutsch. Berlin/New York: IdS Jahrbuch 1990: 41–72
Mattheier, K. (1996). ‘Varietätenkonvergenz. Überlegungen zu einem Baustein einer Theorie der Sprachvariation’. In P. Auer, F. Hinskens, and K. Mattheier (eds.), Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in Europe (Sociolinguistica 10), 31–52CrossRef
Mattheier, K. (1997). ‘Methoden der Sprachinselforschung’. In H. Goebl, P. H. Nelde, Z. Stary, and W. Wölck (eds.), (1996/97). Kontaktlinguistik/Contact linguistics/Linguistique de contact. Ein internationales Handbuch zeitgenössischer Forschung. An international handbook of contemporary research. Manuel international des recherches contemporaines. Halbbd. 1. Berlin/New York: 812–819
Mazur, J. (1996). ‘Konvergenz und Divergenz in den polnischen Sprachvarietäten’. In P. Auer, F. Hinskens, and K. Mattheier (eds.), Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in Europe (Sociolinguistica 10), 53–74CrossRef
McCafferty, K. (1998). ‘Shared accents, divided speech community? Change in Northern Ireland English’, Language Variation and Change, 10(2): 97–121CrossRefGoogle Scholar
McCloskey, J. (1991). ‘Clause structure, ellipsis and proper government in Irish’, Lingua 85: 259–302CrossRefGoogle Scholar
McCloskey, J. (1992). ‘Adjunction, selection and embedded verb second’, Working Paper LRC-92–07. Linguistics Research Center, University of California at Santa Cruz
McCloskey, J. and Hale, K. (1984). ‘On the syntax of person-number inflection in Modern Irish’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory: 1, 487–533Google Scholar
McConvell, P. (1988). ‘Mix-im-up: aboriginal codeswitching, old and new’, in M. Heller (ed.), Codeswitching. Anthropological and Sociolinguistic Perspectives. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 97–149CrossRef
McMahon, A. M. S. (1995). Understanding Language Change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Meechan, M. and Foley, M. (1994). ‘On resolving disagreement: linguistic theory and variation – There's bridges’, Language Variation and Change 6: 63–85CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Mees, I. (1987). ‘Glottal stop as a prestigious feature in Cardiff English’, English World-Wide 8: 25–39CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Mesthrie, R. (1992). Language in Indenture: A Sociolinguistic History of Bhojpuri-Hindi in South Africa. London: Routledge
Meyerhoff, M. (2002). ‘Communities of practice’. In J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill, and N. Schilling-Estes (eds.), The Handbook of Language Variation and Change. Oxford: Blackwell, 526–548
Mhac an Fhailigh, É. (1968). The Irish of Erris, Co. Mayo. Dublin: Dublin Institute for Advanced Studies
Miller, J. (1993). ‘The grammar of Scottish English’, in Milroy and Milroy (eds.): 99–138
Miller, J. and Brown, K. (1982). ‘Aspects of Scottish English syntax’, English World-Wide 3: 3–17CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Milroy, J. (1992). Linguistic Variation and Change. Oxford: Blackwell
Milroy, J. (2000). ‘Historical description and the ideology of the standard language’. In L. Wright (ed.), The Development of Standard English 1300–1800. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press: 11–28CrossRef
Milroy, J. and Milroy, L. (1985a). Authority in Language. Investigating Language Prescription and Standardization. London: Routledge
Milroy, J. and Milroy, L. (1985b). ‘Linguistic change, social network and speaker innovation’, Journal of Linguistics 21: 339–384CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Milroy, J. and Milroy, L. (1993/1998). ‘Mechanisms of change in urban dialects: the role of class, social network and gender’, International Journal of Applied Linguistics 3: 57–78. Reprinted in P. Trudgill and J. Cheshire (eds.), The Sociolinguistic Reader Ⅰ (1998): 179–195
Milroy, J. and Milroy, L. (1997). ‘Varieties and variation’. In F. Coulmas (ed.), The Handbook of Sociolinguistics. Oxford: Blackwell, 47–64
Milroy, J., Milroy, L., and Hartley, S., (1994). ‘Local and supra-local change in British English: the case of glottalisation’, English World-Wide 15: 1–33CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Milroy, J., Milroy, L., Hartley, S., and Walshaw, D. (1994). ‘Glottal stops and Tyneside glottalization: competing patterns of variation and change in British English’, Language Variation and Change 6: 327–358CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Milroy, L. (1980). Language and Social Networks. Oxford: Blackwell
Milroy, L. (1982). ‘Social network and linguistic focusing’. In S. Romaine (ed.) (1982), Sociolinguistic Variation in Speech Communities. London: Edward Arnold, 141–153
Milroy, L. (1984a). ‘What a performance! Some problems with the competence-performance distinction’. In R. Hawkins and J. Harris (eds.), Sheffield Working Papers in Linguistics. Sheffield: University of Sheffield, 40–55 (also published in 1985 with the same title in Australian Journal of Linguistics 51: 1–17)
Milroy, L. (1984b). ‘Comprehension and context: successful communication and communicative breakdown’, in P. J. Trudgill (ed.), Applied Sociolinguistics. London: Academic Press, 7–31
Milroy, L. (1986). ‘Questions and answers; an analysis of the discourse structure of interviews’. In Harris, J., Little, D. and Singleton, D. (eds.), Perspectives on the English Language in Ireland. Dublin: Centre for Language and Communication Studies, Trinity College, Dublin, 49–63
Milroy, L. (1987a). Observing and Analysing Natural Language. Oxford: Blackwell
Milroy, L. (1987b). Language and Social Networks. 2nd edn. Oxford: Blackwell
Milroy, L. (1992). ‘New perspectives in the analysis of sex differentiation in language’. In K. Bolton and H. Kwok (eds.), Sociolinguistics Today. International Perspectives. London/New York: Routledge, 163–179
Milroy, L. (1996). ‘Review of Henry (1995)’, Language in Society 25: 471–475CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Milroy, L. (1999). ‘Standard English and language ideology in Britain and the United States’. In Bex and Watts: 173–206
Milroy, L. (2002a). ‘Introduction: mobility, contact and language charge – working with contemporary speech communities?Journal of Sociolinguistics, 6(1): 3–15CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Milroy, L. (2002b). ‘Social networks’. In J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill, and N. Schilling-Estes (eds.), The Handbook of Language Variation and Change. Oxford: Blackwell: 550–572
Milroy, L. and Gordon, M. (2003). Sociolinguistics. Method and Interpretation. Oxford: BlackwellCrossRef
Milroy, L. and Margrain, S. (1980). ‘Vernacular language loyalty and social network’. In Language in Society 9: 43–70CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Milroy, L. and Milroy, J. (1992). ‘Social network and social class: towards an integrated sociolinguistic model’, Language in Society 21(1): 1–26CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Milroy, L. and Milroy, J. (eds.) (1993). Real English: The Grammar of English Dialects in the British Isles. London: Longman
Minervini, L. (1998). ‘Dialect convergence in the formation of Judeo-Spanish (16th cent.)’. Paper presented at the conference on The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe, Reading, 17–19 September
Mitchell, J. C. (ed.) (1969). Social Network in Urban Situations. Manchester: Manchester University Press
Mitzka, W. (1922). ‘Dialektgeographie der Danziger Nehrung’. In Zeitschrift für deutsche Mundarten
Møller, J. and Quist, P. (2003). ‘Research on youth and language in Denmark’, International Journal of the Sociology of Language 159: 57–72Google Scholar
Mondéjar, J. (1991). ‘Andaluz’. In Lexikon der Romanistischen Linguistik Ⅵ. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer, 430–446
Montoya Abad, B. (1995). ‘L'observació del canvi fonologic en el català balear’, in M. T. Turrell Julià (ed.), La sociolingüitica de la variació. Barcelona (PPU), 165–219
Moore, G. (1990). ‘Structural determinants of men's and women's personal networks’, American Sociological Review 55: 726–735CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Moreno Fernández, F. (1996). ‘Metodología del “Proyecto para el estudio sociolingüístico del español de España y de América’ (PRESEEA), Lingüística 8: 257–287Google Scholar
Moretti, M. (1988). La differenziazione interna di un continuum dialettale. Indagine a Cevio (TI). Zurich: Zentralstelle der Studentenschaft
Mugglestone, L. (1995). ‘Talking Proper’. The Rise of Accent as Social Symbol. Oxford: Oxford University Press
Mühlhäusler, P. (1997). Pidgin and Creole Linguistics. Expanded and revised edition. London: University of Westminster Press
Mummendey, A. (1999). ‘Gesellschaftlicher Umbruch und soziale Identität. Sozialpsychologische Perspektiven’. Talk delivered to the SFB 417, Universität Leipzig, 24 November 1999
Münstermann, H. and van Hout, R. (1986). ‘Taalattitudes contra geschiktheid en gebruik’. In J. Creten, G. Geerts, and K. Jaspaert (eds.), Werk-in-uitvoering; momentopname van de sociolinguïstiek in België en Nederland. Leuven/Amersfoort: Acco, 235–248
Muysken, P. (1981). ‘Halfway between Spanish and Quechua: the case for relexification’. In A. Highfield and A. Valsman (eds.), Historicity and Variation in Creole Studies. Ann Arbor: Karoma, 52–78
Muysken, P. (1989). ‘The morphology/syntax interface in Quechua dialectology’. In Benincà (ed.): 41–52
Muysken, P. (1995). ‘Ottersum revisited: style shifting and code-switching’. Paper presented at the Dutch Tweede Sociolinguïstische Conferentie, 18–19 May, 1995, Lunteren, The Netherlands
Muysken, P. (1999a). ‘Three processes of borrowing: borrowability revisited’. In G. Extra and L. Verhoeven (eds.), Bilingualism and Migration. Berlin/New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 229–246
Muysken, P. (1999b). Talen. De Toren van Babel. Amsterdam: Amsterdam University Press
Muysken, P. (2000). ‘Radical modularity and the possibility of sociolinguistics’. Paper presented at the Sociolinguistics Symposium 2000, 27–29 April, University of the West of England, Bristol
Muysken, P. and Smith, N. (1995). ‘The study of pidgin and creole languages’. In J. Arends, P. Muysken, and N. Smith (eds.), Pidgins and Creoles. An Introduction. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 3–14
Muysken, P. and Veenstra, T. (1995). ‘Universalist approaches’. In J. Arends, P. Muysken, and N. Smith (eds.), Pidgins and Creoles. An Introduction. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 121–134
Myers-Scotton, C. (1993). Duelling Languages. Grammatical Structure in Codeswitching. Oxford: Clarendon Press
Myers-Scotton, C. (1997). ‘“Matrix language recognition” and “morpheme sorting” as possible structural strategies in pidgin/creole formation’. In A. K. Spears and D. Winford (eds.), The Structure and Status of Pidgins and Creoles. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: Benjamins, 151–174
Myers-Scotton, C. (1999). ‘Compromise structural strategies in codeswitching’. In G. Extra and L. Verhoeven (eds.), Bilingualism and Migration. Berlin/New York: de Gruyter, 211–227CrossRef
Naro, A. (1981). ‘The social and structural dimensions of a syntactic change’, Language 57: 63–98CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Nelde, P. (2001). ‘Die neue Mehrsprachigkeit – Perspektiven einer europäischen Sprachpolitik’. Inaugural address upon the accession to the ‘Leibnizprofessur’ at the University of Leipzig
Nespor, M. and Vogel, I. (1986). Prosodic Phonology. Dordrecht/Riverton: Foris
Nesse, A. (1998). ‘Determining linguistic contacts in the past: the case of Low German and Bergen Norwegian’. Paper presented at the conference on The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe, Reading, 17–19 September
Newbrook, M. (1999). ‘West Wirral: norms, self-reports and usage’. In P. Foulkes and G. J. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 90–106
Newton, B. (1972). The Generative Interpretation of Dialect. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Niebaum, H. (1990). ‘Staatsgrenze als Bruchstelle? Die Grenzdialekte zwischen Dollart und Vechtegebiet’. In Kremer and Niebaum (eds.): 49–83
Niedzielski, N. and Giles, H. (1996). ‘Linguistic accommodation’. In H. Goebl et al. (eds.), Kontaktlinguistik – Ein internationales Handbuch zeitgenössischer Forschung, Vol. 1(1), 332–342
Nielsen, N. Å. (1952). ‘Abrahamsons og Todes oplysninger om rigsmålsudtalen omkring 1800’. In Sprog og Kultur, Vol. 19: 33–57
Nishida, C. (1994). ‘The Spanish reflexive clitic se as an aspectual class marker’, Linguistics 32: 425–458CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Nortier, J. (2001). Murks en straattaal. Vriendschap en taalgebruik onder jongeren. Amsterdam: Prometheus
Nöth, D. (1994). ‘Spuren der verlernten Muttersprache? Beobachtungen zum Artikelgebrauch beim Sprachwiedererwerb von Rußlanddeutschen’. Unpublished MS. Berlin
Nyman, L. (1997). ‘Einige Beobachtungen zu Varietäten und Varietätenausgleich im Niederdeutsch der Orenburger Rußland-Mennoniten’. In Historische Soziolinguistik des Deutschen Ⅲ. Sprachgebrauch und sprachliche Leistung in sozialen Schichten und soziofunktionalen Gruppen. Internationale Fachtagung Rostock/Kühlungsborn 15.–18.9.1996. Hrsgg. v. Gisela Brandt. Stuttgart: 261–276
Ó Baoill, D. P. (1990). ‘Language contact in Ireland: the Irish phonological substratum in Irish-English’. In G. A. Edmondson et al. (eds.), Development and Diversity: Language Variation across Time and Space. Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics and University of Texas at Arlington, 147–172
Ó Baoill, D. P. (1997). ‘The emerging Irish phonological substratum in Irish English’. In J. Kallen (ed.), Focus on Ireland. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 73–87CrossRef
Ó Cuív, B. (1944). The Irish of West Muskerry, Co. Cork. Dublin: Dublin Institute for Advanced Studies
Ó Curnáin, B. (1998). ‘Polygenesis of a third plural pronoun in West Galway Irish’. Paper presented at the ESF Conference: The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe, 17–19 September, University of Reading
Odlin, T. (1989). Language Transfer: Cross-Linguistic Influence in Language Learning. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Omdal, H., (1977). ‘Høyangermålet – en ny dialekt’, Språklig Samling 18: 7–9Google Scholar
Omdal, H., (1994). ‘From the valley to the city: language modification and language attitudes’. In B. Nordberg (ed.), The Sociolinguistics of Urbanization. The Case of the Nordic Countries. Berlin: de Gruyter, 116–148CrossRef
Orton, H., Dieth, E., and Wakelyn, M. (1968). The Survey of English Dialects, Vol. 4 (the Southern Counties). Leeds: E. J. Arnold
Paardekooper, P. (2001). ‘Hoe zacht is saft?Onze taal 6: 153Google Scholar
Paasi, A. (1996). Territories, Boundaries and Consciousness: The Changing Geographies of the Finnish–Russian Border. New York: Wiley
Pandeli, H., Eska, J. F., Ball, M. J., and Rahilly, J. (1997). ‘Problems of phonetic transcription: the case of the Hiberno-English slit-t’, Journal of the International Phonetic Association 27: 65–75CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Paolillo, J. C. (1997). ‘Sinhala diglossia: discrete or continuous variation?’, Language in Society 26(2): 269–296CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Pardy, A. (1987). ‘To examine the distribution of the sociolinguistic variable (t) across different contexts’. Unpublished project report, School of Clinical Speech and Language Studies, Trinity College Dublin
Parodi, C., Quicoli, C., Saltarelli, M., and Zubizareta, M. L. (eds.) (1996). Aspects of Romance Linguistics. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press
Patrick, P. (2002). ‘The speech community’. In J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill, and N. Schilling-Estes (eds.), Handbook of Language Variation and Change. Oxford: Blackwell
Paul, H. (1870/5th edn. 1920). Prinzipien der Sprachgeschichte. 5e Auflage. Halle: Niemeyer
Pautasso, M. ‘“Competenza sbilanciata” e parlato narrativo: passaggi di codice e enunciati mistilingui in emigrati biellesi di ritorno’. In G. Berruto and A. A. Sobrero (eds.), Studi di sociolinguistica e dialettologia italiana offerti a Corrado Grassi, Galatina, Congedo: 123–150
Pearce, E. (1995). ‘Diachronic change and negation in French’. In L. Haegeman (ed.), Rivista di Linguistica (thematic issue) The Syntax of Sentential Negation, 301–328
Pedersen, I. L. (1996). ‘Regionalism and linguistic change’. In P. Auer, F. Hinskens, and K. Mattheier (eds.), Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in Europe (Sociolinguistica 10), 75–89CrossRef
Pedersen, I. L. (1997). ‘Sprogarter og sprogforandring i 1800-tallet’. In P. Widell and M. Kunøe (eds.), 6. Møde om Udforskningen af Dansk Sprog til minde om Peter Skautrup 1896–1996. Århus: Institut for Nordisk Sprog og Litteratur, 237–245
Pedersen, I. L. (1998). ‘Stylistic convergence and social divergence: on the emergence of socially stratified spoken standards in the Nordic countries’. Paper presented at the conference on The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe, Reading, 17–19 September
Pedersen, I. L. (2000). ‘Urban and rural dialects of Slesvig: political boundaries in the millenial retreat of Danish in Slesvig’. In J. Kallen, F. Hinskens, and J. Taeldeman (eds.), Dialect Convergence and Divergence Across European Borders = International Journal of the Sociology of Language 145: 131–151
Pedersen, I. L. (2001). ‘Bymålenes stilling i Danmark’. In M. Saari (ed.), Våra språk i tid och rum. Helsingfors: Institutionen för nordiska språk och litteratur, 169–180
Pedersen, I. L. (2003). ‘Traditional dialects of Danish and the de-dialectalization 1900–2000’, International Journal of the Sociology of Language 159: 9–28Google Scholar
Pedersen, I. L. (in press). ‘Sociolinguistic structures chronologically I: Danish’. In The Nordic Languages. An International Handbook of the History of the North Germanic Languages. Vol. 2. Berlin: de Gruyter
Pedersen, K. M. (1999). ‘Genusforenklingen i københavnsk’, Danske Folkemål 41: 79–106Google Scholar
Pellegrini, G. B. (1972). ‘La classificazione delle lingue romanze e i dialetti italiani’. In G. B. Pellegrini (ed.), Saggi sul ladino dolomitico e sul friulano, Adriatica: Bari, 239–268
Peterson, J. (1996). ‘Sociolinguistic interviewer style variation: hyperconvergence in the other informant’. In M. Meyerhoff (ed.), (N) WAVES and MEANS: A Selection of Papers from NWAVE 24 = University of Pennsylvania Working Papers in Linguistics 3(1): 159–170
Pierce, A. (1992). Language Acquisition and Syntactic Theory. Dordrecht: Kluwer
Pinker, S. (1994). The Language Instinct: How the Mind Creates Language. New York: Harper-Collins
Pintzuk, S. (1991). ‘Phrase Structures in Competition: Variation and Change in Old English Word Order’. Unpublished Ph.D. diss., University of Pennsylvania
Pintzuk, S. (1993). ‘Verb seconding in Old English: verb movement to INFL’, The Linguistic Review 10: 5–35CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Pizzolotto, G. (1991). Bilinguismo ed emigrazione in Svizzera. Italiano e commutazione di codice in un gruppo di giovani. Bern: Lang
Platzack, C. (1987). ‘The Scandinavian languages and the null subject parameter’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory 5: 377–401CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Poeppel, D., and Wexler, K. (1993). ‘The full competence hypothesis of clause structure in early German’, Language 69: 1–33CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Pohl, J. (1978). ‘Communication field and linguistic field: the influence of the border (France and Belgium) on the French Language’, International Journal of the Sociology of Language 15: 85–90CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Polenz, P. von (1999). Deutsche Sprachgeschichte vom Spätmittelalter bis zur Gegenwart. Bd. 3. 19. und 20. Jahrhundert. Berlin/New York: de Gruyter
Policansky, L. (1976). ‘Syntactic variation in Belfast English’, Belfast Working Papers in Language and Linguistics 5: 217–231Google Scholar
Policansky, L. (1982). ‘Grammatical variation in Belfast English’, Belfast Working Papers in Language and Linguistics 6: 37–66Google Scholar
Pollard, C. and Sag, I. (1987). Information-based Syntax and Semantics. Stanford: CSLI
Pop, S. (1950). La dialectologie. Aperçu historique et méthodes d'enquêtes linguistiques. Première partie: dialectologie Romane. Louvain: ‘Chez l'auteur’
Poplack, S. (1980). ‘“Sometimes I'll start a sentence in English y termino en español”: toward a typology of code-switching’, Linguistics 18: 581–618CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Poplack, S. and Tagliamonte, S. (1996). ‘Nothing in context: variation, grammaticization and past time marking in Nigeria Pidgin English’. In P. Baker (ed.), Changing Meanings, Changing Functions. London: University of Westminster Press, 71–94
Potter, J. and Wetherell, M. (1987). Discourse and Social Psychology: Beyond Attitudes and Behaviour. London: Sage
Preston, D. (1996). ‘Whaddayaknow?: the modes of folk linguistic awareness’, Language Awareness 5(1): 40–74CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Preston, D. (ed.) (1999). Handbook of Perceptual Dialectology. Vol. 1. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John BenjaminsCrossRef
Prince, E. (1992). ‘The ZPG letter: subjects, definiteness and information status’. In William C. Mann and Sandra A. Thompson (eds.), Discourse Description: Diverse Linguistic Analyses of a Fundraising Text. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 295–325CrossRef
Pulleyblank, D. (1997). ‘Optimality Theory and features’. In D. Archangeli and D. T. Langendoen (eds.), Optimality Theory: An Overview. Oxford: Blackwell, 59–101
Quirk, R., Greenbaum, S., Leech, G., and Srantrik, J. (1995). A Grammer of Contemporary English. Harlow: Longman
Radford, A. (1990). Syntactic Theory and the Acquisition of English Syntax. Oxford: Blackwell
Radford, A., Atkinson, M., Britain, D., Clahsen, H., and Spencer, A. (1999). Linguistics: An Introduction. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Ramge, H. (1982). Dialektwandel im mittleren Saarland. Saarbrücken: Veröffentlichungen des Instituts für Landeskunde im Saarland – Band 30
Rampton, B. (1995). Crossing: Language and Ethnicity among Adolescents. Harlow: Longman
Rein, K. (1994). ‘Die Geschichte rußlanddeutscher Täufergruppen in Amerika und ihre Bedeutung für die Sprachinsel-und Sprachkontaktforschung’. In N. Berend and K. J. Mattheier (eds.), Sprachinselforschung: eine Gedenkschrift für Hugo Jedig. Frankfurt am Main: 193–203
Reitan, J. (1928). ‘Oplysninger om målet i Bardo og Målselven’, Maal og Minne 1928: 1–35Google Scholar
Requena, F. (1995). ‘Determinantes estructurales de las redes sociales en los hombres y las mujeres’. Papers 45 (1995): 33–41
Requena, F. (1996). Redes sociales y cuestionarios. Madrid: CIS
Rickford, J. (1987). The haves and have nots: sociolinguistic surveys and the assessment of speaker competence. Language in Society: 16(2): 149–177CrossRef
Rickford, J. (1988). ‘Connections between sociolinguistics and pidgin-creole studies’, International Journal of the Sociology of Language 71: 51–57Google Scholar
Rickford, J., Mendoza-Denton, N., Wasow, T., and Espinoza, J. (1995). ‘Syntactic variation and change in progress: loss of the verbal coda in topic-restricting as far as constructions’, Language 71: 102–131CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Riehl, C. (2001). ‘Das Deutsche im Sprachkontakt: individuelle und universelle Entwicklungstendenzen’. Paper presented at the 23rd Jahrestagung of the Deutsche Gesellschaft für Sprachwissenschaft. Leipzig, March
Rizzi, L. (1991). ‘Residual verb second and the wh-criterion’, Technical Reports in Formal and Computational Linguistics, 2, University of Geneva
Roberts, I. G. (1985). ‘Agreement parameters and the development of English modal auxiliaries’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory 3: 21–57CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Roberts, I. G. (1993). Verbs and Diachronic Syntax: A Comparative History of English and French. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic
Roberts, I. G. (1997). ‘Directionality and word order change in the history of English’. In van Kemenade and Vincent (eds.): 397–426
Robertson, R. (1993). Globalization. Social Theory and Global Culture. Repr. London: Sage
Roeper, T. and Weissenborn, J. (1990). ‘How to make parameters work: comments on Valian’. In L. Frazier and J. de Villiers (eds.), Language Processing and Language Acquisition. Dordrecht: Kluwer, 147–162CrossRef
Rogier, D. (1994). ‘De verspreiding van een sociaal hooggewaardeerd taalkenmerk: de huig-R rond Gent’, Taal en Tongval, themanummer 7: R-zes visies op een kameleon: 45–53
Romaine, S. (1980a). ‘The relative clause marker in Scots English: diffusion, complexity and style as dimensions of syntactic change’, Language in Society 9: 221–247CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Romaine, S. (1980b). ‘A critical overview of the methodology of urban British sociolinguistics’, English World Wide 1(2): 163–198CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Romaine, S. (1980c). ‘On the problem of syntactic variation: a reply to Beatriz Lavandera and William Labov’. Working Papers in Sociolinguistics 82. Austin, Texas: South-West Educational Development Laboratory
Romaine, S. (1981). ‘Syntactic complexity, relativization and stylistic levels in Middle Scots’, Folia Linguistica Historica 2: 56–77CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Romaine, S. (1982a). Socio-historical Linguistics: Its Status and Methodology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Romaine, S. (1982b). ‘What is a speech community?’ In S. Romaine (ed.), Sociolinguistic Variation in Speech Communities. London: Edward Arnold, 13–24
Romaine, S. (1984a). ‘Relative clauses in child language, pidgins and creoles’, Australian Journal of Linguistics 4: 257–281CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Romaine, S. (1984b). ‘The status of sociological models and categories in explaining linguistic variation’, Linguistiche Berichte 90: 25–80Google Scholar
Romaine, S. (1984c). ‘On the problem of syntactic variation and pragmatic meaning in sociolinguistic theory’, Folia Linguistica 18: 409–437CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Romaine, S. (1989a). ‘Pidgins, creoles, immigrant and dying languages’. In N. Dorian (ed.), Investigating Obsolescence. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 369–384
Romaine, S. (1989b). Bilingualism. Oxford: Blackwell
Romaine, S. (1998). ‘Introduction’. In S. Romaine (ed.), The Cambridge History of the English Language, vol. Ⅳ 1776–1997. Cambridge: Cambridge University PressCrossRef
Rosenberg, P. (1994a). ‘Varietätenkontakt und Varietätenausgleich bei den Rußlanddeutschen: Orientierungen für eine moderne Sprachinselforschung’. In N. Berend and K. J. Mattheier (eds.), Sprachinselforschung: eine Gedenkschrift für Hugo Jedig. Frankfurt am Main: 123–164
Rosenberg, P. (1994b). ‘Sprachgebrauchsstrukturen und Heterogenität der Kommunikationsgemeinschaft bei den Deutschen in der GUS – eine empirische Studie’. In P.-P. König and H. Wiegers (eds.), Satz – Text – Diskurs. Akten des 27. Linguistischen Kolloquiums, Münster 1992. Bd. 2. Tübingen: 287–298
Rosenberg, P. (1997). ‘Die Sprache der Deutschen in Rußland’. In G. Stricker (ed.), Deutsche Geschichte im Osten Europas. Ruβland. Berlin: Siealer, 585–608
Rosenberg, P. (1998). ‘Deutsche Minderheiten in Lateinamerika’. In Particulae particularum. Festschrift zum 60. Geburtstag von Harald Weydt. Herausgegeben von Theo Harden und Elke Hentschel. Tübingen: 261–291
Rosewarne, D. (1984). ‘Estuary English’, Times Educational Supplement 42, 19 October
Røyneland, U. (2000). ‘Is age-grading always a potential problem in apparent time studies?’ In J. Fontana, L. McNally, M. Turell, and E. Vallduví (eds.), ICLaVE 1. Proceedings of the First International Conference on Language Variation in Europe. Barcelona, Universitat Pompeu Fabra, 187–196
Rumley, D. and Minghi, J. (eds.) (1991). The Geography of Border Landscapes. London: Routledge
Russell, P. (1995). An Introduction to the Celtic Languages. London: Longman
Russo, M., and Roberts, J. (1999). ‘Linguistic change in endangered dialects: the case of alternation between avoir and être in Vermont French’, Language Variation and Change 11(1): 19–41CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Ryan, E. B. and Giles, H. (eds.) (1982). Attitudes Towards Language. Social and Applied Contexts. London: Edward Arnold
Ryckeboer, H. (2000). ‘The role of political borders in the millenial retreat of Dutch (Flemish) in the north of France’. In J. Kallen, F. Hinskens, and J. Taeldeman (eds.), 79–108
Sadowski, A. (1995). Pogranicze polsko-białoruskie: tożsamość mieszkańców [The identity of the inhabitants of the Polish–Belarusian border region]. Białystok: Transhumana
Sahlins, P. (1989). Boundaries: The Making of France and Spain in the Pyrenees. Berkeley: University of California Press
Salmons, J. (1994). ‘Naturalness and morphological change in Texas German’. In N. Berend and K. J. Mattheier (eds.), Sprachinselforschung. Eine Gedenkschrift für Hugo Jedig. Frankfurt am Main: 59–72
Samuels, M. (1972). Linguistic Evolution – with Special Reference to English. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Sándor, K. (1998). ‘Political changes as an accelerating factor in syntactic change in varieties of Hungarian’. Paper presented at the ESF conference The Convergence and Divergence of Dialects in a Changing Europe, 17–19 September, University of Reading
Sandøy, H. (1998a). ‘Talenorm i NRK’. In R. Vatvedt Fjeld and B. Wangensteen (eds.), Normer og Regler. Festskrift til Dag Gundersen 15. januar 1998. Oslo: Nordisk forening for leksikografi: 158–170
Sandøy, H. (1998b). ‘The diffusion of a new morphology in Norwegian dialects’. In P. Auer (ed.), Dialect Levelling and the Standard Varieties in Europe (= Folia Linguistica 32(12): 83–100)
Sandøy, H. (2000). ‘Utviklingslinjer i moderne norske dialektar’, Folkmålsstudier 39: 345–384
Sandøy, H. (2003a). ‘Språkendring, kontakt og spreiing’. In Mæhlum et al. (eds.), Språkmøte. Innføring i sosiolingvistikk. Oslo: Cappelen Akademisk Forlag, 196–247
Sandøy, H. (2003b). ‘Types of society and language change in the Nordic countries’. In B.-L. Gunnarson et al. (eds.), Language Variation in Europe. Uppsala: Uppsala University, Dept. of Scandinavian Languages, 53–76
Sankoff, D. (1988). ‘Sociolinguistics and syntactic variation’. In F. Newmeyer (ed.), Linguistics: The Cambridge Survey, Ⅳ. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 140–161CrossRef
Sankoff, D. and Labov, W. (1979). ‘On the uses of variable rules’, Language in Society 8: 189–223CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Sankoff, G. (1973). ‘Above and beyond phonology in variable rules’. In C.-J. Bailey and R. W. Shuy (eds.), New Ways of Analysing Variation in English. Washington DC: Center for Applied Linguistics, 44–61
Sankoff, G. (1974). ‘A quantitative paradigm for the study of communicative competence’. In R. Bauman and J. Sherzer (eds.), Explorations in the Ethnography of Speaking. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 18–49
Sankoff, G. and Vincent, D. (1977). ‘L'emploi productif du ne dans le Français parlé à Montréal’, Le Français Moderne 45: 243–256Google Scholar
Sapir, E. (1921). Language. An Introduction to the Study of Speech. San Diego: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich
Saporta, S. (1965). ‘Ordered rules, dialect differences, and historical processes’, Language 41: 218–224CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Sarhimaa, A. (2000). ‘The divisive frontier: the impact of the Russian–Finnish border on Karelian’. In J. Kallen, F. Hinskens, and J. Taeldeman (eds.), Dialect Convergence and Divergence across European borders (International Journal of the Sociology of Language 145: 153–180)
Sasse, H.-J. (1985). ‘Sprachkontakt und Sprachwandel: Die Gräzisierung der albanischen Mundarten Griechenlands’. Papiere zur Linguistik 32: 37–95Google Scholar
Saville-Troike, Muriel (1982). The Ethnography of Communication. An Introduction. Oxford: Blackwell
Scheibman, J. (2002). Point of View and Grammar: Structural Patterns of Subjectivity in American English Conversation. Amsterdam: John Benjamins
Scherre, M. M. P. (2001). ‘Phrase-level parallelism effect on noun phrase number agreement’, Language Variation and Change 13(1): 91–107CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Scheuringer, H. (1990). ‘Bayerisches Bairisch und österreichisches Bairisch. Die deutsch-österreichische Staatsgrenze als “Sprachgrenze”?’ In Kremer and Niebaum (eds.): 361–381
Schilling-Estes, N. (2000). ‘On the nature of insular and post-insular dialects: innovation, variation and differentiation’. Paper presented at Sociolinguistics Symposium 2000, 27–29 April, University of the West of England. [To appear in a Special Issue of the Journal of Sociolinguistics, edited by Lesley Milroy.]
Schilling-Estes, N. and Wolfram, W. (1994). ‘Convergent explanation and alternative regularization patterns: were/weren't levelling in a vernacular English variety’, Language Variation and Change 6: 273–302CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Schirmunski, V. M. (1928). Die deutschen Kolonien in der Ukraine. Geschichte, Mundarten, Volkslied, Volkskunde. Charkow
Schirmunski, V. M. (1930). ‘Sprachgeschichte und Siedelungsmundarten’, Germanisch-Romanische Monatschrift ⅩⅧ, 113–122 (Teil Ⅰ), 171–188 (Teil Ⅱ)
Schirmunski, V. M. (1962). Deutsche Mundartkunde. Vergleichende Laut-und Formenlehre der deutschen Mundarten. Berlin
Schlobinski, P. (1997). The Sociolinguistics of Berlin Urban Vernacular. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter
Schmeller, J. A. (1984). Cimbrisches Wörterbuch, das ist deutsches Idioticon der Ⅶ und ⅩⅢ communi in den venetianischen Alpen. Edited and introduced by J. Bergmann. Vienna: Bracemüller. Re-edited as Über die Sogenannten Cimbern der Ⅶ. und ⅩⅢ. Communen auf den Venedischen Alpen und ihre Sprache. Landshut: Curatorium Cimbricum Bavarense, 1985
Schmidt, J. (1872). Die Verwandtschaftsverhältnisse der indogermanischen Sprachen. Weimar: Böhlau
Schmieger, R. (1998). ‘The situation of the Macedonian language in Greece: sociolinguistic analysis’, International Journal of the Sociology of Language 131: 125–155CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Schuchardt, H. (1870). Über die Klassifikation der romanischen Mundarten. Leipziger Probevorlesung. Graz, 1900
Schuchardt, H. (1885). Über die Lautgesetze, gegen die Junggrammatiker. Berlin: Oppenheim
Schwitalla, J. (2002). ‘Kohäsion statt Kohärenz. Bedeutungsverschiebungen nach dem Sprecherwechsel – vornehmlich in Streitgesprächen’. In A. Deppermann and T. Spranz-Fogasy (eds.), Be-deuten: Wie Bedeutung im Gespräch entsteht. Tübingen: Stauffenburg, 106–118
Sebba, M. (1997). Contact Languages: Pidgins and Creoles. London: Macmillan
Seip, D. A. (1916). Grundlaget for det norske Riksmaal. Kristiania: Olaf Nordlis Forlag
Seip, D. A. (1920). ‘Til Riksmålets Forhistorie’. Maal og Minne 1920: 129–142
Selkirk, E. O. (1982). ‘The syllable’. In H. van der Hulst and N. Smith (eds.), The Structure of Phonological Representations, Vol. 2. Dordrecht: Foris, 337–383
Selkirk, E. O. (1984). Phonology and Syntax: The Relation Between Sound and Structure. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press
Sells, P., Rickford, J. R., and Wasow, T. (1996a). ‘An optimality theoretic approach to variation in negative inversion in AAVE’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory 14: 591–627CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Sells, P., Rickford, J. R., and Wasow, T. (1996b). ‘Variation in negative inversion in AAVE: an optimality theoretic approach’. In J. Arnold, R. Blake, B. Davidson, S. Schwenter, and J. Solomon (eds.), Sociolinguistic Variation: Data, Theory, and Analysis. Stanford: CSLI, 161–176
Selting, M. (1983). ‘Institutionelle Kommunikation: Stilwechsel als Mittel strategischer Interaktion’, Linguistische Berichte 86: 29–48Google Scholar
Seppänen, A. (1999). ‘Dialectal variation in English relativization’, Lingua 109: 15–34CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Shuy, R. (1990). ‘A brief history of American sociolinguistics’, Historiographia Linguistica 17(1/2): 183–209CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Siebenhaar, B. (1999). Sprachvariation, Sprachwandel und Einstellung. Der Dialekt der Stadt Aarau in der Labilitätszone zwischen Zürcher und Berner Mundartraum. Stuttgart: Steiner
Siegel, J. (1985). ‘Koines and koineization’, Language in Society 14(3): 357–378CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Siegel, J. (1987). Language Contact in a Plantation Environment. A Sociolinguistic History of Fiji. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Siegel, J. (1992). ‘Language change and culture change among Fiji Indians’. In T. Dutton (ed.), Culture Change, Language Change. Case Studies from Melanesia (= Pacific Linguistics C120: 91–113)
Siegel, J. (1993). ‘Dialect contact and koineization’. In J. Siegel (ed.), Koines and koineization (= International Journal of the Sociology of Language 99: 105–121)
Siegel, J. (1997). ‘Mixing, leveling, and pidgin/creole development’. In A. K. Spears and D. Winford (eds.), The Structure and Status of Pidgins and Creoles. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins, 111–149CrossRef
Siegel, J. (2001). ‘Koine formation and creole genesis’. In N. Smith and T. Veenstra (eds.), Creolisation and Contact. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: Benjamins, 175–197CrossRef
Sihler, A. L. (2000). Language History: An Introduction. Amsterdam: Benjamins
Silva-Corvalán, C. (1994). Language Contact and Change: Spanish in Los Angeles. Oxford: Clarendon Press
Singh, R. (1981). ‘On some “redundant compoundsin modern Hindi’, Recherches linguistiques à Montreal/Montreal working papers in linguistics: 17, 169–175Google Scholar
Singh, R. (1995). ‘Rethinking the relationship between phonology and loan phonology’, Folia Linguistica 29: 395–405CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Singh, R. and Ford, A. (1989). ‘A closer look at so-called variable rule processes’. In Fasold and Schiffrin (eds.): 367–379
Skautrup, P. (1944–1970). Det danske sprogs historie, Vols. 1–5. Copenhagen: Gyldendal
Smith, Neil (1989). The Twitter Machine: Reflections on Language. Oxford: Blackwell
Smith, Norval (2000). ‘Dependency Theory meets OT: a proposal for a new approach to segmental structure’. In J. Dekkers, F. van der Leeuw, and J. van der Weijer (eds.), Optimality Theory. Phonology, Syntax, and Acquisition. Oxford/New York: Oxford University Press, 234–276
Smith, Norval (1979). ‘The nonacquisition of a phonological rule: a case of Frisian influence?’ In M. Gerritsen (ed.), Taalverandering in Nederlandse dialekten. Honderd jaar dialektvragenlijsten 1879–1979. Muiderberg: Coutinho, 244–249
Smits, C. (1996). Disintegration of Inflection. The Case of Iowa Dutch. The Hague: Holland Academic Graphics
Snyder, W. (2001). ‘On the nature of syntactic variation. Evidence from complex predicates and complex word-formation’, Language 77(2): 324–342CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Sobin, N. (1987). ‘The variable status of COMP-trace phenomena’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory 5: 33–60CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Sobrero, A. A. (1996). ‘Italianization and variations in the repertoire: the Koinai’, Sociolinguistica 10: 105–111CrossRefGoogle Scholar
‘Sprachwandels’. In Kremer and Niebaum (eds.): 7–21
Stilling, N. P. (1987). De nye Byer. Stationsbyernes befolkningsforhold og funktion 1840–1940. Viborg: Selskabetfor Stationsbyforskning
Straczuk, J. (1999). Język a tożsamość człowieka w warunkach społecznej wielojęzyczności [Language and identity in the context of societal multilingualism]. Warsaw: Wydawnictwo Uniwersytetu Warszawskiego
Strassoldo, R. (ed.) (1973). Confini e regioni. Trieste: Edizioni LINT
Strassoldo, R. and Gubert, R. (1973). ‘The boundary. An overview of its current theoretical status’. In Strassoldo (ed.): 29–57
Stråth, B. (ed.) (1990). Language and the Construction of Class Identities. Gothenburg: Gothenburg University
Ström, A. and Schirmunski, V. M. (1926/1927). ‘Deutsche Mundarten an der Newa’. In Teuthonista 3(1–2): 39–62Google Scholar
Stroop, J. (1998). Poldernederlands. Waardoor het ABN verdwijnt. Amsterdam: Bert Bakker
Stuart-Smith, J. (1999). ‘Glasgow: accent and voice quality’. In P. Foulkes and G. J. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 203–222
Stuart-Smith, J. (2001). ‘Should variationists worry about the influence of TV on speech?’ Plenary lecture given at the 3rd UK Language Variation Conference, Department of Language and Linguistic Science, University of York, 19–22 July
Stubbe, M. and Holmes, J. (1995). ‘“You know”, “eh” and other “exasperating expressions”: An analysis of social and stylistic variation in the use of pragmatic devices in a sample of New Zealand English’, Language and Communication 15: 63–88CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Sudbury, A. (2000). ‘Dialect contact and koinéisation in the Falkland Islands: development of a southern hemisphere English?’ Ph.D. thesis, University of Essex
Sudbury, A. (2001). ‘Falkland Islands English: a southern hemisphere variety?’, English World Wide 22: 55–80CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Sundgren, E. (2000). ‘A Swedish case study of language change in real time: the impact of integration in the local community on linguistic behaviour’. Paper presented at the Ist International Conference on Language Variation in Europe (ICLaVE 1), Barcelona, 29 June–1 July
Suñer, M. and Lizardi, C. (1995). ‘Dialectal variation in an argumental/non-argumental asymmetry in Spanish’, in J. Amastae, G. Goodall, M. Montalbetti, and M. Phinney (eds.), Contemporary Research in Romance Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 187–203CrossRef
Svensson, L. (1981). Ett fall av språkvård under 1600-talet. Lundastudier i nordisk språkvetenskap. Lund: Walter Ekstrand
Swigart, L. (1992). ‘Two codes or one? The insiders’ view and the description of codeswitching in Dakar’. In C. M. Eastman (ed.), Codeswitching, Multilingual Matters, Clevedon: 83–102CrossRef
Syv, P. (1919) (1685). ‘Den danske Sprog-Kunst’. In Henrik Bertelsen (ed.), Danske Grammatikere, Vol. 3. Copenhagen: Gyldendal: 147–250
Taeldeman, J. (1978). De vokaalstruktuur van de Oostvlaamse dialecten. Amsterdam: K.N.A.W
Taeldeman, J. (1984). ‘Joas Lambrechts “Nederlandsche Spellijnghe” (1550) als spiegel van het (Laat-) Middelgentse vokaalsysteem’. In W. J. J. Pijnenburg, K. Roelandts, and V. F. Vanacker (eds.), Feestbundel Maurits Gysseling. Leuven: 325–334
Taeldeman, J. (1985). De klankstruktuur van het Gentse dialect. Ghent: Recueil Faculteit Letteren en Wijsbegeerte
Taeldeman, J. (1993). ‘Dialectresistentie en dialectverlies op fonologisch gebied’. In F. Hinskens, C. Hoppenbrouwers, and J. Taeldeman (eds.), Dialectverlies en regiolectvorming (Taal en tongval 46, 102–119)
Taeldeman, J. (1998). ‘Levelling phenomena in the Flemish dialects: some observations on their teleology’. In P. Auer (ed.), Dialect Levelling and the Standard Varieties in Europe, Folia Linguistica 32, 11–22CrossRef
Taeldeman, J. (1999). ‘Het Gents. Een eiland in het Oost-Vlaamse dialectgebied’. In J. Kruijsen and N. van der Sijs (eds.), Honderd jaar stadstaal. Amsterdam/Antwerp: Uitg. Contact, 273–287
Taeldeman, J. (2000). ‘Polarisering’, Taal en tongval 52, 227–244Google Scholar
Tagliamonte, S. (1997). ‘Obsolescence in the English perfect? Evidence from Samaná English’, American Speech 72(1): 33–68CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Taeldeman, J. (1998). ‘Was/were variation across the generations: view from the city of York’, Language Variation and Change, 10(2): 153–191Google Scholar
Tagliamonte, S. and Hudson, R. (1999). ‘Be like et al. beyond America: The quotative system in British and Canadian youth’, Journal of Sociolinguistics 3(2): 147–172CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Tagliamonte, S. and Poplack, S. (1988). ‘How Black English PAST got to the present: evidence from Samaná’, Language in Society 17(4): 513–533CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Tagliamonte, S. and Smith, J. (1999). ‘Analogical levelling in Samaná English’, Journal of English Linguistics 27(1): 8–26CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Teleman, U. (2002). Ära, rikedom & reda. Svensk språkvård och språkpolitik under äldre nyare tid. Stockholm: Norstedts ordbok
Tenny, C. L. (1987). Grammaticalizing Aspect and Affectedness. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Thakerar, J. N., Giles, H., and Cheshire, J. (1982). ‘Psychological and linguistic parameters of speech accommodation theory’. In C. Fraser and K. R. Scherer (eds.), Advances in the Social Psychology of Language. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 205–255
Thelander, M. (1980). ‘De-dialectalisation in Sweden’. FUMS Rapport No. 86. Uppsala: Uppsala University
Thelander, M. (1982). ‘A qualitative approach to the quantitative data of speech variation’. In S. Romaine (ed.), Sociolinguistic Variation in Speech Communities. London: Edward Arnold, 65–83
Thomas, A. R. (1972). ‘A note on dialect borrowing’, Studia Celtica 7: 163–167Google Scholar
Thomason, S. G. and Kaufmann, T. (1988). Language Contact, Creolization, and Genetic Linguistics. Berkeley: University of California Press
Thorsen, P. K. (1929) (1906). ‘Hvor gammelt er det nye i det danske sprog?’ In Afhandlinger og Breve, Vol. 2. Copenhagen: Schønbergske 84–86
Thurneysen, R. (1946). A Grammar of Old Irish. Dublin: Dublin Institute for Advanced Studies
Tibiletti Bruno, M. G. (1974). ‘Integrazione linguistica degli anziani in un paese del Varesotto’. In Dal dialetto alla lingua. Pisa: Pacini, 195–227
Tode, J. C. (1797). Neue Dänische Grammatik für Deutsche. Copenhagen
Tokc’, S. (2000). ‘Etničnyja pracesy na terytoryi belaruska-pol'skaha pamežža Û ⅩⅨ – na pačatku ⅩⅩ stahoddzja [Ethnic processes on the territory of the Belarusian-Polish border region in the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries]. In E. Smułkowa and A. Engelking (eds.), Język a tożsamość na pograniczu kultur [Language and identity in cultural borderlands]. Białystok: Katedra Kultury Białoruskiej Uniwersytetu w Białymstoku, 101–114
Tollfree, L. (1999). ‘South East London English: discrete versus continuous modelling of consonantal reduction’. In P. Foulkes and G. J. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 163–184
Tollfree, L. (2001). ‘Variation and change in Australian consonants: reduction of /t/’. In D. Blair and P. Collins (eds.), English in Australia. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 45–67CrossRef
Tönnies, F. (1887). Gemeinschaft und Gesellschaft. Leipzig: Fues
Torgersen, E. N., and Kerswill, P. E. (2004). ‘Internal and external motivation in phonetic change: dialect levelling outcomes for an English vowel shift’, Journal of Sociolinguistics 8(1): 24–53CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Toribio, A. J. (1993). ‘Parametric Variation in the Licensing of Nominals’. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, Cornell University, Ithaca, NY
Toribio, A. J. (1996). ‘Dialectal variation and the licensing of null referential and expletive pronouns’, in Parodi et al. (eds.): 409–432
Toribio, A. J. (2000). ‘Intralingual variation’. Paper presented at Sociolinguistics Symposium 2000, 27–29 April, University of the West of England, Bristol
Torp, A. (2001). ‘Retroflex consonants and dorsal /r/: mutually excluding innovations? On the diffusion of dorsal /r/ in Scandinavian’. In H. Van de Velde and R. van Hout (eds.), R-atics. Etudes et Travaux (Bruxelles), No. 4: 75–90
Tottie, G. and Rey, M. (1997). ‘Relativization strategies in Earlier African American Vernacular English’, Language Variation and Change 9: 219–247CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Trask, R. L. (1996). Historical Linguistics. London: Arnold
Trautmann, M. (1880). ‘Besprechung einiger schulbücher nebst bemerkungen über die rlaute’, Anglia 3, 201–222Google Scholar
Trosterud, T. (1989). ‘The null subject parameter and the new mainland Scandinavian word order: a possible counter example from a Norwegian dialect’. In J. Niemi (ed.), Papers from the 11th Scandinavian Conference of Linguistics 1: 87–100
Trudgill, P. J. (1972). ‘Sex, covert prestige and linguistic change in the urban British English of Norwich’, Language in Society 1: 179–195CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Trudgill, P. J. (1974a). The Social Differentiation of English in Norwich. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Trudgill, P. J. (1974b). ‘Linguistic change and diffusion: description and explanation in sociolinguistic geography’, Language in Society 3: 215–246CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Trudgill, P. J. (1978). ‘Introduction: sociolinguistics and sociolinguistics’. In P. Trudgill (ed.), Sociolinguistic Patterns in British English. London: Edward Arnold, 1–18
Trudgill, P. J. (1983a). ‘Linguistic change and diffusion. Description and explanation in geolinguistics’. In P. Trudgill (ed.), On Dialect. Oxford: Blackwell, 52–87
Trudgill, P. J. (1983b). On Dialect. Oxford: Blackwell
Trudgill, P. J. (1986). Dialects in Contact. Oxford: Blackwell
Trudgill, P. J. (1988). ‘On the role of dialect contact and interdialect in linguistic change’. In J. Fisiak (ed.), Historical Dialectology. Regional and Social. Berlin/New York/Amsterdam: Mouton de Gruyter, 547–563CrossRef
Trudgill, P. J. (1990). The Dialects of England. Oxford: Blackwell
Trudgill, P. J. (1992). ‘Dialect contact, dialectology and sociolinguistics’. In K. Bolton and H. Kwok (eds.), Sociolinguistics Today. International Perspectives. London/New York: Routledge, 71–79
Trudgill, P. J. (1994). ‘Language contact and dialect contact in linguistic change’. In K. Ulla-Britt and J. Helgander (eds.), Dialektkontakt, Språkkontakt och Språkföråndring i Norden. Föredrag Från ett Forskarsymposium. Stockholm: Institutionen För Nordiska Språk, Stockholms Universitet, 13–22
Trudgill, P. J. (1996). ‘Dialect typology: isolation, social network and phonological structure’. In G. R. Guy et al., Towards a Social Science of Language, Vol. 1. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins, 3–22CrossRef
Trudgill, P. J. (1998). ‘The chaos before the order: New Zealand English and the second stage of new-dialect formation’. In E. H. Jahr (ed.), Advances in Historical Sociolinguistics. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 1–11
Trudgill, P. J. (1999). ‘Norwich: endogenous and exogenous linguistic change’. In P. Foulkes and G. J. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 124–140
Trudgill, P. J. (2000). ‘Sociolinguistics and sociolinguistics once again’. Sociolinguistica 14: 55–59CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Trudgill, P. J. (2002a). ‘The sociolinguistics of modern RP’. In P. Trudgill, Sociolinguistic Variation and Change. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 171–180
Trudgill, P. J. (2002b). ‘Linguistic and social typology’. In J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill, and N. Schilling-Estes (eds.), The Handbook of Language Variation and Change. Oxford: Blackwell. 707–728
Trudgill, P. J. (2004). New-Dialect Formation: The Inevitability of Colonial Englishes. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press
Trudgill, P. J. and Chambers J. K. (eds.) (1991). Dialects of English: Studies in Grammatical Variation. London: Longman
Trudgill, P. J., Gordon, E., Lewis, G., and Maclagan, M. (2000). ‘Determinism in new-dialect formation and the genesis of New Zealand English’, Journal of Linguistics 36: 299–318CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Turner, B. (1996). The Blackwell Companion to Social Theory. Oxford: Blackwell
Valian, V. (1991). ‘Syntactic subjects in the early speech of American and Italian children’, Cognition 40: 21–81CrossRefGoogle ScholarPubMed
Vammen, H. (1990). ‘Bourgeois mentality in Denmark 1730–1900’. In B. Stråth (ed.), Language and the Construction of Class Identities. Gothenburg: Gothenburg University, 283–310
Van Bree, C. (1990). Historische Taalkunde. Leuven/Amsterdam: Acco
Van Bree, C. (1994). ‘The development of so-called Town Frisian’. In P. Bakker and M. Mous (eds.), Mixed Languages. 15 Case studies in language intertwining. Amsterdam: IFOTT, 69–82
Van Bree, C. (1997). Een oud onderwerp opnieuw bekeken: het Ingweoons. Farewell address, Leiden University: Leiden University Press
Van Coetsem, F. (1988). Loan Phonology and the Two Transfer Types in Language Contact. Dordrecht/Providence: Foris
Van Coetsem, F. (2000). A General and Unified Theory of the Transmission Process in Language Contact. Heidelberg: Winter
Van de Velde, H. (1996). ‘Variatie en verandering in het gesproken Standaard-Nederlands (1935–1993)’. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, University of Nijmegen
Van der Horst, J. and Marschall, F. (1992). Korte geschiedenis van de Nederlandse taal. Amsterdam: Nijgh & Van Ditmar
Van Kemenade, A. (1987). ‘Syntactic Case and Morphological Case in the History of English’. Unpublished Ph.D. diss., Rijksuniversiteit, UtrechtCrossRef
Van Kemenade, A. (1993). ‘Parametric change and the history of English impersonals’. Paper presented at the LAGB, 14 September, Bangor, UCNW
Van Kemenade, A. (1994). ‘Old and Middle English’. In E. König and J. van der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London/New York: 110–141
Van Kemenade, A. and Vincent, N. (eds.) (1997). Parameters of Morphosyntactic Change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Van Marle, J. (1997). ‘Dialect versus standard language: nature versus culture’. In J. Cheshire and D. Stein (eds.), Taming the Vernacular. From Dialect to Written Standard Language. London/New York: Longman, 13–34
Van Ness, S. (1994). ‘Pennsylvania German’. In E. König and J. van der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London/New York: 420–438
Van Oostendorp, M. (1997). ‘Style levels in conflict resolution’. In F. Hinskens, R. van Hout, and L. Wetzels (eds.), Variation, Change and Phonological Theory. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: Benjamins, 207–229CrossRef
Van Riemsdijk, H. C. (1978). A Case Study in Syntactic Markedness. Dordrecht: Foris
Vandekerckhove, R. (1998). ‘Code-switching between dialect and standard language as a graduator of dialect loss and dialect vitality. A case study in West Flanders’. Zeitschrift für Dialektologie und Linguistik 65: 280–292Google Scholar
Verstegen, V. (1942). ‘De Westgermaanse sk in de Zuidnederlandse dialecten’. In Handelingen Koninklijke Commissie voor Toponymie en Dialectologie 16: 31–42 + 2 mapsGoogle Scholar
Vikør, L. S. (1993). The Nordic Languages. Oslo: Novus
Vikør, L. S. (1994). Språkplanlegging. Prinsipp og praksis. Oslo: Novus
Vikør, L. S. (2001). The Nordic languages. Their Status and Interrelations. Oslo: Novus
Vikør, L. S. (2002). ‘The Nordic language area and the languages in the north of Europe’. In The Nordic Languages. An International Handbook of the History of the North Germanic Languages, Vol. 1. Berlin/New York: de Gruyter: 1–12
Villena, J. A. (1994). La ciudad lingüística. Fundamentos críticos de la sociolingüística urbana. Granada: Universidad
Villena, J. A. (1996). ‘Convergence and divergence in a standard dialect continuum: networks and individuals in Malaga’. In Auer and Hinskens (eds.) (1996): 112–137
Villena, J. A. (2001). La continuidad del cambio lingüístico. Tendencias conservadoras e innovadoras en la fonología del español. Granada: Universidad
Villena, J. A. and Requena, F. (1996). ‘Género, educación y uso lingüístico: la variación social y reticular de s y z en la ciudad de Málaga’. Lingüística 8: 548Google Scholar
Vinje, F. E. (1984). ‘“Damer sier kjød”. Dannet dagligtale dengang og nå’. In B. Fossestøl et al. (eds.), Festskrift til Einar Lundeby, 3 Oktober 1984. Oslo: Novus, 211–236
Vinje, F. E. (1987). Rent ut sagt – En veiledning i østnorsk standardtalespråk. Oslo: Novus
Vinje, F. E. (1998). ‘Talemålsnormering i NRK’. In Vatvedt Fjeld and B. Wangensteen (eds.), Normer og Regler. Festskrift til Dag Gundersen 15. januar 1998. Oslo: Nordisk forening for leksikografi, 143–157
von Unwerth, W. (1918). Proben deutschrussischer Mundarten aus den Wolgakolonien und dem Gouvernement Cherson. (Abhandlungen der Preußischen Akademie der Wissenschaften. Philologisch-historische Klasse. 11). Berlin
Voortman, B. (1994). Regionale variatie in het taalgebruik van notabelen. Een sociolinguïstisch onderzoek in Middelburg, Roermond en Zutphen. Ph.D. thesis University of Amsterdam: IFOTT
Wang, W. S.-Y. (ed.) (1977). The Lexicon in Phonological Change. The Hague: Mouton
Wängler, H. H. (1963). Rangwoerterbuch hochdeutscher Umgangssprache. Marburg
Wassermann, S. and Galaskiewicz, J. (eds.) (1994). Advances in Social Network Analysis. Research in the Social and Behavioural Sciences. London & Thousand Oaks: Sage
Wassermann, S. and Faust, K. (1994). Social Network Analysis: Methods and Applications. New York: Cambridge University Press
Watt, D. and Milroy, L. (1999). ‘Patterns of variation and change in three Newcastle vowels: is this dialect levelling?’ In P. Foulkes and G. J. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 25–46
Watts, R. J. (2000). ‘Mythical strands in the ideology of prescriptivism’. In L. Wright (ed.), The Development of Standard English 1300–1800. Theories, Descriptions, Conflicts. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 29–48CrossRef
Weijnen, A. (1977). The Value of the Map Configuration. Special issue of Mededelingen van de Nijmeegse Centrale voor Dialect-en Naamkunde
Weiner, E. J. and Labov, W. (1983). ‘Constraints on the agentless passive’, Journal of Linguistics 19: 29–58CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Weinreich, U. (1953). Languages in Contact. The Hague: Mouton
Weinreich, U. (1954). ‘Is a structural dialectology possible?’, Word 10(2/3): 388–400CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Weinreich, U., Labov, W., and Herzog, M. (1968). ‘Empirical foundations for a theory of language change’. In W. Lehmann and Y. Malkiel (eds.), Directions for Historical Linguistics; a Symposium. Austin: University of Texas Press, 95–188
Weinrich, H. (1985). Textgrammatik der französischen Sprache, 1. Aufl. 1982. Stuttgart: Nachdruck
Weissenborn, J., Goodluck, H., and Roeper, T. (eds.) (1992). Theoretical Issues in Language Acquisition. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum
Wellman, B. (1998). ‘Structural analysis: from metaphor to substance’. In B. Wellman and S. D. Berkowitz (eds.), Social Structures: A Network Approach. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Wells, J. C. (1982). Accents of English, 3 vols. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Wessén, I. (1937). ‘Vårt riksspråk. Några huvudpunkter av dess historiska utveckling’. In Modermålslärarnas förenings årsskrift
White, L. (1989). Universal Grammar and Second Language Acquisition. Amsterdam: John Benjamins
Widmark, G. (1991). ‘Boksvenska och talsvenska. Om språkarter i nysvenskt talspråk’, Språk och Stil Ny följdl: 157–197
Wiese, R. (2001). ‘The unity and variation of (German) /r/’. In H. Van de Velde and R. van Hout (eds.), R-atics. Etudes et Travaux (Brussels), No. 4: 11–26
Wiesinger, P. (1983). ‘Deutsche Dialektgebiete außerhalb des deutschen Sprachgebiets: Mittel-, Südost-und Osteuropa’. In W. Besch, U. Knoop, W. Putschke, and H. E. Wiegand (eds.), Dialektologie. Ein Handbuch zur deutschen und allgemeinen Dialektforschung. Halbbd. 2. Berlin/New York: 900–929CrossRef
Williams, A. and Kerswill, P. (1999). ‘Dialect levelling: change and continuity in Milton Keynes, Reading and Hull’. In P. Foulkes and G. Docherty (eds.), Urban Voices: Accent Studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold, 141–162
Williams, G. (1992). Sociolinguistics. A Sociological Critique. London/New York: Routledge
Wilson, J. and Henry, A. (1998). ‘Parameter setting within a socially realistic linguistics’, Language in Society 27: 1–21CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Wilson, T. M. and Donnan, H. (eds.) (1998). Border Identities: Nation and State at International Frontiers. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Winford, D. (1984). ‘The linguistic variable and syntactic variation in creole continua’, Lingua 62, 267–288CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Winford, D. (1993). ‘Variation in the use of perfect have in Trinidadian English: a problem of categorial and semantic mismatch’, Language Variation and Change 5: 141–187CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Winford, D. (1996). ‘The problem of syntactic variation’. In J. Arnold, R. Blake, B. Davidson, S. Schwenter, and J. Solomon (eds.), Sociolinguistic Variation: Data, Theory, and Analysis. Stanford: CSLI Publications, 177–192
Winge, V. (1992). Dänische Deutsche – deutsche Dänen. Geschichte der deutschen Sprache in Dänemark 1300–1800 mit einem Ausblick auf das 19. Jahrhundert. Heidelberg: Carl Winter Universitätsverlag
Wolfram, W. (1969). A Sociolinguistic Description of Detroit Negro Speech. Washington, DC: Center for Applied Linguistics
Wolfram, W. (1975). ‘Variable constraints and rule relations’, in R. Fasold and R. Shuy (eds.), Analysing Variation in Language. Washington DC: Center for Applied Linguistics, 70–88
Wolfram, W. (1991). ‘The linguistic variable: fact and fantasy’, American Speech 66(1): 22–32CrossRef
Wolfram, W. (1993). ‘Identifying and interpreting variables’. In D. R. Preston (ed.), American Dialect Research. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 193–222CrossRef
Wolfram, W. and Hazen, K. (1996). ‘Isolation within isolation: the invisible Outer Banks dialect’. In M. Meyerhoff (ed.), (N) WAVES and MEANS: A Selection of Papers from NWAVE 24 = University of Pennsylvania Working Papers in Linguistics 3(1): 141–157
Wolgadeutscher Sprachatlas (WDSA) (1996). Aufgrund der von Georg Dinges 1925–1929 gesammelten Materialien. Bearb. und hrsg. von Nina Berend. Unter Mitarb. von Rudolf Post. Tübingen/Basle
Wollersheim, H.-W. (1998). ‘Identifikation’. In H.-W. Wollersheim, S. Tzschaschel, and M. Middell (eds.), Region und Identifikation. Leipzig: Leipziger Universitätsverlag, 47–55
Woods, H. B. (1991). ‘Social differentiation in Ottawa English’. In J. Cheshire (ed.), English Around the World: Sociolinguistic Perspectives. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 134–149CrossRef
Woods, N. J. (2000). ‘Archaism and innovation in New Zealand English’, English World Wide 21: 109–150CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Worm, P. (1873). ‘Skriftsproget og Folkemaalene’. Nordisk Maanedsskrift. Odense: Den Miloske Boghandel, 81–115
Wrede, F. (1919). ‘Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der deutschen Mundartforschung’, Zeitschrift für deutsche Mundarten: 3–18
Zagona, K. (1994). ‘Compositionality of aspect: evidence from Spanish aspectual se’. Communication LSRL 24. Los AngelesGoogle Scholar
Zeller, C. (1993). ‘Linguistic symmetries, asymmetries and border effects within a Canadian/American sample’. In Clarke, Sandra (ed.), Focus on Canada. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins, 179–199CrossRef
Zipf, G. (1946). ‘The P1P2/D hypothesis: on the intercity movement of persons’, American Sociological Review 11(6): 677–686CrossRefGoogle Scholar

Save book to Kindle

To save this book to your Kindle, first ensure coreplatform@cambridge.org is added to your Approved Personal Document E-mail List under your Personal Document Settings on the Manage Your Content and Devices page of your Amazon account. Then enter the ‘name’ part of your Kindle email address below. Find out more about saving to your Kindle.

Note you can select to save to either the @free.kindle.com or @kindle.com variations. ‘@free.kindle.com’ emails are free but can only be saved to your device when it is connected to wi-fi. ‘@kindle.com’ emails can be delivered even when you are not connected to wi-fi, but note that service fees apply.

Find out more about the Kindle Personal Document Service.

  • References
  • Edited by Peter Auer, Albert-Ludwigs-Universität Freiburg, Germany, Frans Hinskens, Meertens Institute, Amsterdam and and Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, Paul Kerswill, Lancaster University
  • Book: Dialect Change
  • Online publication: 22 September 2009
  • Chapter DOI: https://doi.org/10.1017/CBO9780511486623.016
Available formats
×

Save book to Dropbox

To save content items to your account, please confirm that you agree to abide by our usage policies. If this is the first time you use this feature, you will be asked to authorise Cambridge Core to connect with your account. Find out more about saving content to Dropbox.

  • References
  • Edited by Peter Auer, Albert-Ludwigs-Universität Freiburg, Germany, Frans Hinskens, Meertens Institute, Amsterdam and and Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, Paul Kerswill, Lancaster University
  • Book: Dialect Change
  • Online publication: 22 September 2009
  • Chapter DOI: https://doi.org/10.1017/CBO9780511486623.016
Available formats
×

Save book to Google Drive

To save content items to your account, please confirm that you agree to abide by our usage policies. If this is the first time you use this feature, you will be asked to authorise Cambridge Core to connect with your account. Find out more about saving content to Google Drive.

  • References
  • Edited by Peter Auer, Albert-Ludwigs-Universität Freiburg, Germany, Frans Hinskens, Meertens Institute, Amsterdam and and Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, Paul Kerswill, Lancaster University
  • Book: Dialect Change
  • Online publication: 22 September 2009
  • Chapter DOI: https://doi.org/10.1017/CBO9780511486623.016
Available formats
×